EV URM SW 7.x - M1205553 - 0111 - 004 - EN - MSN

Engström Carestation
User’s Reference Manual

Software Revision 7.X
Datex-Ohmeda, Inc., a General Electric Company, doing business as GE Healthcare.
User Responsibility
This Product will perform in conformity with the description thereof
contained in this User’s Reference manual and accompanying labels
and/or inserts, when assembled, operated, maintained, and repaired
in accordance with the instructions provided. This Product must be
checked periodically. A defective Product should not be used. Parts
that are broken, missing, plainly worn, distorted, or contaminated
should be replaced immediately. Should repair or replacement
become necessary, Datex-Ohmeda recommends that a telephonic or
written request for service advice be made to the nearest
Datex-Ohmeda Customer Service Center. This Product or any of its
parts should not be repaired other than in accordance with written
instructions provided by Datex-Ohmeda and by Datex-Ohmeda
trained personnel. The Product must not be altered without the prior
written approval of Datex-Ohmeda. The user of this Product shall
have the sole responsibility for any malfunction which results from
improper use, faulty maintenance, improper repair, damage, or
alteration by anyone other than Datex-Ohmeda.
CAUTION U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the

order of a licensed medical practitioner. Outside the
U.S.A., check local laws for any restriction that can apply.
Datex-Ohmeda products have unit serial numbers with coded logic
which indicates a product group code, the year of manufacture, and a
sequential unit number for identification. The serial number can be in
one of two formats.
AAAX11111 AAAXX111111AA
The X represents an alpha character The X X represents a number indicating
indicating the year the product was the year the product was manufactured;
manufactured; H = 2004, J = 2005, etc. 04 = 2004, 05 = 2005, etc.
I and O are not used.
Engström, Carestation, ComWheel, D-fend, SpiroDynamics,

INview, and EView are registered trademarks of Datex-Ohmeda, Inc.
Other brand names or product names used in this manual are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction
What is an Engström Carestation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Symbols used in the manual or on the equipment . . . . . . . . 1-3
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Setting definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Hard keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
2 System Controls and Menus
Ventilator overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Lock/Unlock menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Touch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Waveform field touch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Measured value touch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Digit field touch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Quick key touch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Active alarm touch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Turning the Touchscreen On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Turning the Favorites Bar On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Setting up the Favorites Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Using the Favorites Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Display controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Ventilator display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
System menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Select Patient menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
M1205553 i
NIV Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Vent Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Parameters Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Data Transfer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Spirometry menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Procedures menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Alarms Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Trends menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
3 Setup and Connections
General use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Attaching the breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Module bay connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Gas supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Communication port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Port 4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Electronic micropump nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Assembling the nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Filling the nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Disassembling the nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Disposable nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Auxiliary pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Purging of tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Zeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Exhalation valve heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Remote mount display arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Humidifier mount (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Support arm (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Isolated electrical outlets (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Electrical outlet panel ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
EVair 03 compressor (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Before each use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
ii M1205553
Table of Contents
4 Operation
Preparing the ventilator for a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Turning on the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Select Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Patient weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Patient ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Pre-use checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Testing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Vent Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Ventilation preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Alarms setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Selecting a data source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Starting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Entering Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Turning the system off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Park Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Changing settings while ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Ventilation preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Using snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Taking a snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Viewing a snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Viewing trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Trends split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Viewing waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Viewing spirometry Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Sensor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Spirometry menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Using the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Spirometry split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Lower spiro split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
M1205553 iii
Performing Vent Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Performing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Increase O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Pneumatic nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Manual Breath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
P 0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Negative Inspiratory Force (NIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Vital Capacity (VC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Intrinsic PEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
PEEPi Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Inspiratory Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Expiratory Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Spontaneous Breathing Trial (SBT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Rapid Shallow Breathing Index (RSBI) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
EVair 03 compressor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
5 Airway Modules
Compact airway modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

D-fend water trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Connection to a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Gas exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Measurement limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Patient spirometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Measurement principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Static measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Gas calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
6 Alarms and Troubleshooting
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Display changes during alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Internal failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Backup audio buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
iv M1205553
Table of Contents
Battery indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

List of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
7 Cleaning and Maintenance
Repair policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Maintenance summary and schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Datex-Ohmeda approved service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
User maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Recommended part replacement period . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Checking system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Battery performance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
EVair 03 compressor maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Airway module preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Cleaning and sterilization information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Sterilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Component processing compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
CIDEX PLUS disinfection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
CIDEX OPA disinfection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Fan filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Support arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
EVair 03 compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Airway module components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Cleaning and sterilization (ISO 17664 compliant) . . . . . . . 7-12
Neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Expiratory flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Exhalation valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Aeroneb Pro nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Cleaning unit between uses for the same patient . . . . 7-17
Disinfecting unit between uses for the same patient . . 7-18
Sterilizing unit between patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Water trap - ventilator mounted (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
M1205553 v
8 Theory of Operation
Ventilation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Ventilating in Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Setting families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Volume controlled ventilation (VCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Pressure controlled ventilation (PCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Pressure controlled ventilation -
volume guaranteed (PCV-VG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation -
volume controlled (SIMV-VC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
pressure controlled (SIMV-PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
BiLevel airway pressure ventilation (BiLevel) . . . . . . . 8-14
Constant positive airway pressure/pressure
support ventilation (CPAP/PSV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
pressure controlled volume guaranteed
(SIMV-PCVG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
BiLevel airway pressure ventilation -
volume guaranteed (BiLevel-VG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Electrical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Display Unit (DU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Ventilator Control Board (VCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Ventilation Monitoring Board (VMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Power Management Board (PMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Monitoring Module Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Pneumatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Inspiratory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Expiratory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Hazard protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
vi M1205553
Table of Contents
9 Parts
Exhalation valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Exhalation valve heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
AC power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
System accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
System parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Airway module parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
EVair 03 compressor parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Shelf Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
10 Installation Mode
Install/Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Ventilator settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Default menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Data transfer settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Calibration menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
11 Specifications
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Pneumatic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Battery information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Internal batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Ventilation operating specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
M1205553 vii
Ventilation delivery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Tidal volume delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Inspired pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
PEEP control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Oxygen - air mixing accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Inspiratory and expiratory resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Ventilator monitoring specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Airway module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Gas specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Typical performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
EVair 03 compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Compressor pneumatic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Compressor electrical block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration -
electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration -
electromagnetic immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Recommended separation distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
EC-60601-1 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
12 INview Ventilation Tools
FRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
FRC theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Performing FRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
FRC INview scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
PEEP INview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
FRC Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
SpiroDynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
SpiroDynamics theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Setting up SpiroDynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Viewing SpiroDynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Using the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
viii M1205553
Table of Contents
Lung INview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Using Lung INview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
INview Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
INview Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
13 Neonatal Option
Neonatal ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Volume guaranteed pressure support (VG-PS) . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Connecting the flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Turning the flow sensor off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Calibrating the flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Cleaning the neonatal flow sensor
(ISO 17664 compatible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Preparing the ventilator for a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Select Patient menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Patient Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Pre-use checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Testing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Ventilation preferences menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Paux Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Scaling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Alarms Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Performing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Increase O2 and suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Neonatal Increase O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
INview ventilation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Neonatal Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Neonatal Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Graphical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
M1205553 ix
Neonatal specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

Ventilation operating specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Ventilation delivery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Ventilator monitoring specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
14 Non-invasive Option
Non-invasive ventilation (NIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
NIV mode theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Preparing the ventilator for a patient in
non-invasive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Changing from non-invasive mode to invasive mode . 14-5
Changing from invasive mode to non-invasive mode . 14-5
Changing NIV mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Non-invasive specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Non-invasive mode ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Non-invasive mode alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Pneumatic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Neonatal nasal CPAP mode - theory of operation . . . . . . . 14-8
Preparing the ventilator for a patient in nCPAP mode . . . . 14-9
Changing from nCPAP mode to invasive mode . . . . . 14-10
Changing from invasive mode to nCPAP mode . . . . . 14-10
Changing nCPAP mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
nCPAP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
nCPAP mode ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
nCPAP mode alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
nCPAP monitoring specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
NIV and nCPAP alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Recommended non-invasive ventilation interfaces . . . . . 14-13
NIV Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
nCPAP Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
x M1205553
Table of Contents
15 EView Accessory
EView accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Media compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Standard serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Enhanced serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
EView overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
EView installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Acquiring and transferring data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Data Transfer Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Data Transfer Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Transferring EView data to USB or SD . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
EView functional testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Transferring EView data to the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
EView Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Index
Warranty
M1205553 xi
xii M1205553
1 Introduction
In this section What is an Engström Carestation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Symbols used in the manual or on the equipment . . . . . . . . 1-3
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Setting definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
M1205553 1-1
What is an Engström Carestation?

The Engström Carestation is a critical care ventilator that is flexible
and physically adaptable to a variety of work environments. It has an
intuitive user interface that is common to many Datex-Ohmeda
products. A wide selection of performance options gives the user full
control of the system configuration. The Engström Carestation is a
complete system featuring patient monitoring, patient ventilation, and
the capability of interfacing with central monitoring.
Note Photos and drawings shown in this manual may not be identical to all
variants of the product. Some photos and drawings show accessories
and options that may not be present or available on all variants. This
manual does not cover the operation of every accessory; refer to the
accessory documentation for further information.
The Engström must only be operated by authorized medical
personnel well trained in the use of this product, for patient ventilation
in the intensive care environment. It must be operated according to
the instructions in this User’s Reference manual.
The ventilator is designed to be used with infant through adult
patients with a body weight of 5 kg or greater. If the neonatal option is
installed on the ventilator, patients weighing down to 0.25 kg may be
ventilated with the Engström. The Engström is designed to maintain
lung ventilation in the absence of spontaneous breathing effort as
well as in support of the patient’s existing spontaneous breathing
effort. The system is designed for facility use, including within-facility
transport, and should only be used under the orders of a clinician.
AB.98.336
Figure 1-1 • Engström Carestation
1-2 M1205553
1 Introduction
The Carestation consists of three main components: a display, a

ventilator unit, and an optional module bay. The display allows the
user to interface with the system and control settings. The ventilator
unit controls electrical power, nebulization, and pneumatic gas flow to
and from the patient. The module bay allows the integration of various
patient monitoring modules with the ventilator.
Optional accessories include an air compressor, airway modules,
module bay, support arm, humidifier and water trap mounting
brackets, auxiliary electrical outlets, and a neonatal flow sensor.
Symbols used in the manual or on the equipment

Symbols replace words on the equipment, on the display, or in
Datex-Ohmeda manuals.
Warnings and Cautions tell about the dangerous conditions that can
occur if the instructions in the manual are not followed.
Warnings tell about a condition that can cause injury to the operator
or the patient.
Cautions tell about a condition that can cause damage to the
equipment. Read and follow all warnings and cautions.
On (power) Off (power)
On for part of the equipment Off for part of the equipment
Standby Caution: federal law prohibits

dispensing without prescription.
Type BF equipment Type B protection against electrical

shock
Attention, refer to product instructions Caution, ISO 7000-0434

IEC 60601-1
REF Stock number

SN Serial number
Direct current Alternating current
Earth ground Protective earth ground
Equipotential connector Fuse
M1205553 1-3
Lock Unlock
To identify on a control that a function is To identify on a control that a function is

locked or to show the locked status. not locked or to show the unlocked
status.
Variability Variability in steps
+ Plus, positive polarity

- Minus, negative polarity
Movement in one direction Movement in both directions
This way up Warning, dangerous voltage
Pneumatic inlet Pneumatic outlet
Electrical input Electrical output
Inspiratory port Expiratory port
Electrical testing certification Inspiratory breath identifier
Serial port Module data indicator
Module bay port Electronic micropump nebulizer
Auxiliary pressure port Display signal input/output
No battery/battery failure Battery in use. Bar indicates amount of

battery power remaining.
Silence alarms Submenu
Hour meter Drain outlet
1-4 M1205553
1 Introduction
Air Pump
Heavy object USB port
Ethernet connection Network ID connection

(Datex-Ohmeda proprietary port)
134°C Autoclavable Not autoclavable
Authorized representative in the Systems with this mark agree with the
European Community European Council Directive (93/42/
EEC) for Medical Devices when they
are used as specified in their User’s
Reference Manuals. The xxxx is the
certification number of the Notified
Body used by Datex-Ohmeda’s Quality
Systems.
Date of Manufacture Neonatal option is installed
SpiroDynamics option is installed Functional Residual Capacity option is

installed
Maximum Neonatal patient type
Pediatric patient type Adult patient type
Indicates that the waste of electrical GOST R Russian certification

and electronic equipment must not be
disposed as unsorted municipal waste
and must be collected separately.
Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for
information concerning the
decommissioning of equipment.
M1205553 1-5
Manufacturer Non-invasive mode is in use
This product consists of devices that Secure Digital

may contain mercury, which must be
SD
recycled or disposed of in accordance
with local, state, or country laws.
(Within this system, the backlight lamps
in the monitor display contain mercury.)
Writing data into storage device Non-invasive option is installed
Consult operating instructions Heat transfer
This device contains phthalates Single use devices
Risks and precautionary measures This single-use product is not designed

related to phthlates: or validated to be reused. Reuse may
This instruction pertains to the cause a risk of cross-contamination,
phthalate symbol marked on the device affect the measurement accuracy,
or its packaging. If this device is used system performance, or cause a
for the treatment of children, or malfunction as a result of the product
treatment of pregnant or nursing being physically damages due to
women; please note that the following cleaning, disinfection, resterilization, or
types of procedures may increase the reuse.
risk of exposure to phthalates:
Exchange transfusion in neonates,
haemodialysis in peripuberal males,
male fetus and male infant of pregnant
women, and lactating women; and
massive blood infusion into trauma
patients. Although these procedures
have the potential for increased risk of
exposure, conclusive evidence of
human health risks has not been
established, As a precautionary
measure, to reduce the potential for
unnecessary exposures to phthalates,
the product must be used in
accordance with the instruction for use,
and practitioners should refrain from
using this product beyond the period of
time the product is medically necessary
or needed.
1-6 M1205553
1 Introduction
Union made Temperature limitation
Humidity limitation Do not stack
Stacking limit by mass Fragile; handle with care
Keep dry Protect from heat and radioactive

sources
Recyclable material 120 Kg Maximum mass of configured mobile

equipment
Electrostatic sensitive devices Oxygen

O2
M1205553 1-7
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition
A
AaDO2 Alveolar arterial oxygen gradient
ATPD Ambient temperature pressure dry
B
BiLevel BiLevel airway pressure ventilation
BiLevel-VG BiLevel airway pressure, volume guaranteed
BSA Body surface area
BTPS Body temperature pressure saturated
C
Compl Compliance
CPAP/PSV Continuous positive airway pressure/pressure support

ventilation
CO Cardiac output
E
EC Engström Carestation
EE Energy expenditure
ET End-tidal concentration
EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide
EtO2 End-tidal oxygen
F
F-V Flow-Volume loop
FI Fraction of inspired gas
FI-ET Difference between inspiratory and expiratory

concentrations
FiO2 Fraction of inspired oxygen
FRC Functional residual capacity
H
Hb Hemoglobin
I
I:E Inspiratory-expiratory ratio
Insp Pause Inspiratory pause time
1-8 M1205553
1 Introduction
K
kg kilogram
M
ml milliliters
MVexp Expired minute volume
MVexp/wt Expired minute volume per patient weight
MVinsp Inspired minute volume
N
nCPAP Nasal continuous positive airway pressure
Neo Neonatal
NIF Negative inspiratory force
NIV Non-invasive ventilation
O
O2 Oxygen
P
P 0.1 Airway occlusion pressure
PaO2 Arterial partial pressure of oxygen
PAO2 Alveolar arterial oxygen gradient
PaO2/PAO2 Alveolar arterial oxygen pressure gradient
PaCO2 Arterial partial pressure of carbon dioxide
Pa/FiO2 Oxygenation index
PvO2 Venous partial pressure of oxygen
P Vol PEEPi volume
P-F Pressure-Flow loop
P-V Pressure-Volume loop
Pair Air supply pressure
Paux Auxiliary pressure
Paw Airway pressure
Pbaro Barometric pressure
PCV Pressure controlled ventilation
PCV-VG Pressure controlled ventilation - volume guaranteed
Ped Pediatric patient
M1205553 1-9
Pedi Pedi-lite sensor
PEEP Positive end expiratory pressure
PEEPe Extrinsic positive end expiratory pressure
PEEPe+i Total positive end expiratory pressure
PEEPi Intrinsic positive end expiratory pressure
Pexp Expiratory pressure
Phigh High-pressure setting for BiLevel
Pinsp Inspiratory pressure
Plimit High pressure limit
Plow Low-pressure setting for BiLevel
Pmax Maximum pressure
Pmean Mean pressure
PO2 Oxygen supply pressure
Ppeak Peak pressure
Pplat Plateau pressure
Psupp Support pressure
R
Rate Respiratory rate
Raw Airway resistance
RR Respiratory rate
RQ Respiratory quotient
RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index
S
SaO2 Arterial oxygen saturation level (of hemoglobin)
SBT Spontaneous breathing trial
SIMV-PC Synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation -

pressure controlled
SIMV-PCVG Synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation -

pressure controlled, volume guaranteed
SIMV-VC Synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation - volume

controlled
SD Secure Digital
SvO2 Venous oxygen saturation level (of hemoglobin)
1-10 M1205553
1 Introduction
T
Thigh Time setting for high pressure in BiLevel
Tinsp Inspiratory time
Tlow Time setting for low pressure in BiLevel
Tsupp Maximum inspiratory time for a pressure-supported

breath in NIV or VG-PS.
TV Tidal volume
TVexp Expired tidal volume
TVexp/wt Expired tidal volume per patient weight
TVinsp Inspired tidal volume
U
USB Universal Serial Bus
V
VA Alveolar ventilation
VCO2 Carbon dioxide production
VCV Volume controlled ventilation
Vd Dead space volume
Vd/Vt Dead space ventilation
VO2 Oxygen consumption
VO2/kg Oxygen consumption per kilogram
VO2/m2 Oxygen consumption per square meter
Vol Volume
Vol/wt Volume per patient weight
M1205553 1-11
Setting definitions
The following terms and settings are used in the system.
Not all settings are available for all modes of ventilation. The range
and resolution of each of the settings are listed in “Specifications,”
Section 11.
Setting Definition
Bias Flow The minimum flow that is delivered through the patient
circuit during the expiratory phase of the breath cycle. It is
used in the flow trigger mechanism and provides a
reservoir of fresh gas for the patient. The bias flow may
be automatically increased above this setting depending
on the FiO2 setting.
End Flow The percentage of peak flow at which the pressure
supported breath terminates the inspiratory phase and
enters the expiratory phase.
FiO2 The percentage of oxygen that is delivered to the patient
from the ventilator.
Flow Set only in volume modes, the flow setting allows the user
to set the specific flow that the ventilator will use to deliver
the set tidal volume to the patient during the inspiratory
phase of the breath.
I:E The ratio between the inspiratory and expiratory time.
Insp Pause The percentage of inspiratory time at the end of the
inspiratory phase in a volume mode, where the breath is
held and there is no flow.
PEEP The pressure held on the patient’s lungs by the ventilator
at the end of expiration.
Phigh In BILevel mode, Phigh is the high pressure level at which
the patient can spontaneously breathe.
Pinsp The pressure above PEEP delivered to a patient in each
pressure-controlled breath.
In BiLevel mode, Pinsp is the pressure above Plow at

which the patient can spontaneously breathe.
Plimit The pressure at which the breath is limited and held for
the set inspiratory time in a volume mode.
Plow Set only in BiLevel mode, Plow correlates to the PEEP
level in all other modes. It is the low pressure level at
which the patient can spontaneously breathe.
Pmax The maximum airway pressure allowed in the patient
breathing circuit. Once reached, the inspiratory phase will
be terminated and the ventilator will cycle immediately to
the expiratory phase.
Psupp The pressure above PEEP that is delivered during a
pressure-supported breath.
PSV Rise Time The time in milliseconds needed for the profiled pressure
to reach 90% of the set pressure support level.
Pspont The total amount of pressure that is delivered to the
patient for a pressure-supported breath. Calculated as:
PEEP + Psupp or Plow + Psupp.
1-12 M1205553
1 Introduction
Setting Definition
Ptot The total amount of pressure that is delivered to the
patient for a mechanically delivered breath. Calculated
as: PEEP + Pinsp, Plow + Pinsp, or Phigh.
Rate The number of breaths delivered to the patient in one
minute.
Rise Time The time in milliseconds needed for the profiled pressure
to reach 90% of the set Pinsp or volume-controlled flow.
Thigh The amount of time in seconds that the ventilator will hold
the high pressure level in BiLevel mode.
Tinsp The time in seconds that the ventilator uses to deliver the
inspiratory phase of the breath cycle.
Tlow The amount of time in seconds that the ventilator will hold
the low pressure level in BiLevel mode.
Tpause The amount of time in seconds at the end of the
inspiratory phase in a volume mode where the breath is
held and there is no flow.
Tsupp The maximum inspiratory time for PSV in NIV ventilation
mode.
Trig Window The percent of the exhalation time when the ventilator will
synchronize the delivery of the mandatory breath. It is
measured from the end of the expiratory phase back
towards the end of the previous inspiratory phase.
(Only in SIMV or BiLevel-VG modes).
Trigger A signal that causes the ventilator to start the inspiratory
phase of the breath. The trigger can use either a negative
pressure deflection or a flow signal.
TV The set volume of gas delivered from the ventilator on
each volume controlled breath.
Hard keys Names of the hard keys on the display and modules are written in
bold typeface; for example, Normal Screen.
Menu selections Menu selections are written in bold italic typeface; for example,
Patient Setup.
Messages Messages that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in single
quotes; for example, ‘Check sample gas out.’
Sections and headings When referring to different sections or headings in the User’s
Reference manual, the name is written in italic typeface and is
enclosed in double quotes; for example, “System Controls and
Menus.”
M1205553 1-13
1-14 M1205553
In this section Ventilator overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Display controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Ventilator display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
System menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
M1205553 2-1
Ventilator overview
8 9 10 11 12
2
7
INSP EXP
3
6
4
AB.98.277
17 16 15 14 13
AB.98.336
1. Display 10. Expiratory inlet

2. Ventilator unit 11. Expiratory flow sensor
3. Ventilator lock* 12. Gas exhaust port
4. Cart (Trolley) 13. Leak test plug
5. Caster* 14. Exhalation valve housing latch*
6. Dovetail rails 15. Water trap*
7. Module bay (optional) 16. Auxiliary pressure port
8. Nebulizer connection 17. Inspiratory outlet
9. Exhalation valve housing*
Figure 2-1 • Front view
*These items are described in further detail in the following table.
2-2 M1205553
Item, Figure 2-1 Description

3 Ventilator lock There is a lock on one side of the ventilator cart. Pull latch out and lift
ventilator up to remove.
Caution: Ventilator unit is heavy.
5 Caster Press down to lock. Lift up to release.
14 Exhalation valve To remove, press down on the latch to release the exhalation valve
housing and housing. Pull housing off ventilator.
latch INSP EXP
To reinsert, place the tab (1) of the housing into the groove (2) and push
the housing into position. Gently pull on the housing to make sure it is
securely latched.
INSP EXP
2 1
AB.98.305
15 Water trap Unscrew water trap to remove. Empty contents and replace water trap.
M1205553 2-3
21 20 19 19
25
2
23 22 20 19
1
24
2
18 3
4
2 17 5
16
3
15
6
14
13
12 7
11 8
AB.09.308
AB.98.330
AB.09.309
10 9
1. Display fan filter 13. Ventilator unit fan filter

2. Display connection 14. Nurse call/RS232 Serial communication port (Port 4)
3. Module bay connection 15. Arm holder*
4. AC mains inlet and fuse holder 16. Neonatal flow sensor connection (Port 1)
5. System switch* 17. Port 2 (exhalation valve heater)
6. Equipotential connector 18. Port 3 (exhalation valve heater)
7. Module bay mounting thumbscrews* 19. USB port (not currently supported)
8. Oxygen supply connection (pipeline) 20. Ethernet connection (not currently supported)
9. O2 high-pressure inlet filter (optional) 21. RS232 Serial communication port
10. Air high-pressure inlet filter 22. RS232 Serial communication port (Port 6)
11. Air supply connection (pipeline or compressor) 23. EView/RS232 Serial communication port (Port 5)
12. Retaining channel 24. Enhanced serial port*
25. Standard serial port*
Figure 2-2 • Back view
*These items are described in further detail in the following table.
2-4 M1205553
Item, Figure 2-2 Description

5 System switch Set the switch to the On position to power up the ventilator. The
system may only be turned off when in Standby.
7 Module bay mounting The module bay may be placed on either side of the ventilator.
thumbscrews To move:
1. Remove connector from back of module bay, and pull
cable out of the retaining channel.
2. Loosen the thumbscrews.
3. Slide module bay off thumbscrews.
4. Place the module bay on the other side of the ventilator.
5. Tighten the thumbscrews.
6. Insert the cable into the opposite retaining channel by
starting at the inside edge and pushing the remainder of
the cable through.
7. Connect the cable to the module bay connection. Ensure
there is enough excess cable on the end of the module
bay to allow full movement of the module bay.
15 Arm holder The arm may be placed on either side of the ventilator.
To move:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew.
2. Lift arm out of holder.
3. Place the arm on the other side of the ventilator.
4. Tighten the thumbscrew.
See “Support arm” in Section 3 for assembly information.

24 Enhanced serial port The Enhanced Serial Port and Engström System 5.05
software or greater are required to operate EView. See “Eview
Accessory” in Section 15 for information.
25 Standard serial port Engström systems installed with the Standard Serial Port must
upgrade to the Enhanced Serial Port to operate EView. See
“Eview Accessory” in Section 15 for information.
M1205553 2-5
Touchscreen
The Engström display uses touchscreen technology and a Favorites
Bar to easily access system functions, menus, and settings.
Note To use touchscreen capabilities the Touchscreen setting must be set
to On, Engström system software 7.X or greater must be installed,
and the proper Display Unit hardware must be installed. See “Display
Settings” in Section 10.
The touchscreen has numerous touch point areas that make
accessing menus and settings quick and easy. The Favorites Bar
provides direct access to seven user selected functions and
procedures that shortcut to menus and settings.
Touch only one touch point at a time to ensure the correct selection is
made.
CAUTION Do not apply excessive force to the touchscreen as

damage may occur.
1. Lock icon displays only when touchscreen is locked

2. Favorites Bar (shortcut to favorite functions and procedures)
3. Lock/Unlock key to lock or unlock the touchscreen
Figure 2-3 • Touchscreen features
2-6 M1205553
Lock/Unlock menu The Lock icon displays in the General Message field when the
key touchscreen is locked. See Figure 2-3. When the touchscreen is
locked touch points are inactive.
Push the Lock/Unlock key on the left side of the display to lock or
unlock the touchscreen.
Important The Lock icon only displays when the touchscreen is locked.
Figure 2-4 • Lock icon indicates touchscreen is locked
M1205553 2-7
Touch points
6 1
2
5
4
1. Wave field 1, 2, and 3
2. Measured values
3. Digit field
4. Quick keys
5. Favorites Bar
6. Split screen
Figure 2-5 • Normal/Full screen view with shaded touch point areas
4
1
1. Measured values
2. Digit field
3. Quick keys
4. Favorites Bar
Figure 2-6 • Basic screen view with shaded touch points areas
2-8 M1205553
Waveform field touch 1. Touch the waveform field you would like to change.
points 2. The Screen Setup menu displays with the highlight on the
corresponding waveform field that was touched.
• To set the third waveform field when only waveforms 1 and 2
are shown, touch above or below waveform fields 1 and 2.
The Screen Setup menu displays with the highlight on the
Wave Field 3 menu item.
Note Waveform fields 1 (Paw) and 2 (Flow) cannot be changed.
3. Use the ComWheel to select and confirm the desired setting.
4. Select Previous Menu or press the Normal Screen key to exit.
Measured value Touching measured values provides access to the Alarms Setup
touch points menu and alarm limits.
1. Touch the measured value to change the alarm limit.
2. The Alarms Setup menu displays with the highlight on the alarm
limit of the measured value that was touched.
• If there is no corresponding limit to the value that was
touched, the Alarms Setup menu displays with the highlight
on Adjust Limits.
Digit field touch 1. Touch the Digit field to change the value that is displayed.
points 2. The Screen Setup menu displays with the highlight on the Digit
Field menu item.
Quick key touch 1. Touch a quick key to change the value of the setting.
points 2. The touched value displays with a highlight.
Active alarm touch When an alarm sounds the alarm message is displayed at the top of
points the screen and the alarming numeric flashes. The Alarm messages at
the top of the screen are message alerts only and not active touch
points.
1. Touch the flashing numeric to access the Alarms Setup and
alarm limits for the active alarm.
2. The Alarms Setup menu displays with the active alarm limit
highlighted. For example: If the Ppeak high alarm activates, the
high alarm limit setting for Ppeak displays with the highlight.
3. Use the Comwheel to select and confirm the desired setting.
M1205553 2-9
Turning the Touchscreen is enabled when the Touchscreen hardware is detected

Touchscreen On or at startup and the touchscreen is set to On.
Off To turn the touchscreen On or Off, see “Turning the Touchscreen On
or Off” in Section 10.
Note If the Touchscreen is turned Off, the Favorites Bar will no longer be
accessible or displayed.
Turning the Favorites To turn the Favorites Bar On or Off:

Bar On or Off 1. Push the System Setup key.
2. Select Screen Setup - Favorites Setup. The Favorites Setup
menu displays with the highlight on Select Favorites.
3. Use the ComWheel to scroll to Favorites Bar.
4. Select On or Off and confirm the selection.
• Select On to show the Favorites Bar.
Note If the Favorites Bar does not display, make sure Touchscreen is set
to On. See “Turning the Touchscreen On or Off” in Section 10.
• Select Off to not show the Favorites Bar.
5. Use the ComWheel to select Previous Menu or press the
Normal Screen key to exit.
Setting up the The Favorites Bar allows quick access to seven user-selectable
Favorites Bar functions and procedures.
1. Push the System Setup key.
2. Select Screen Setup - Favorites Setup. The Favorites Setup
menu displays with the highlight on Select Favorites.
3. Push the ComWheel to enter the Favorites Setup menu and
scroll to the desired function or procedure you would like to set as
a favorite.
• Use the ComWheel to select On or Off and confirm the
selection.
• Up to seven functions and procedures may be selected for
the Favorites Bar.
Normal Screen key to exit. The Favorites Bar displays on the
left side of the screen.
2-10 M1205553
Using the Favorites 1. Touch a Favorite function or procedure.

Bar 2. The corresponding menu displays.
Important Manual Breath and Suction procedures are immediately started when
touched on the Favorites Bar. No menu is displayed and no
confirmation is required when Manual Breath or Suction is touched.
3. Use the ComWheel to scroll and select the desired settings.
Normal Screen key to exit.
Favorites
Manual
Breath
SBT
Lung
Mechanics
Vent
Preferences
Backup
Mode
Alarm
History
Favorites
Setup
Figure 2-7 • Example of Favorites Bar configuration
M1205553 2-11
Display controls and indicators
3 2
7
4
6
AB.98.326
3 5
1 Alarm LEDs The red and yellow LEDs indicate the priority of active alarms.
2 Silence Alarms key Push to silence any active, silenceable high and medium priority alarms
or to suspend any non-active high or medium priority alarms. Alarm
audio is silenced for 120 seconds for Adult, Pediatric, and Neonatal
patient types. Alarm Audio is suspended for 120 seconds for Adult and
Pediatric patient types, and for 30 seconds for Neonatal patient type.
Push to clear resolved alarms.
3 Menu keys Push to show corresponding menu.
4 ComWheel Push to select a menu item or confirm a setting. Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll menu items or change settings.
5 Normal Screen key Push to remove all menus from the screen.
6 AC mains indicator The green LED lights continuously when the ventilator is connected to
an AC mains source. The internal batteries are charging when the LED
is lit.
7 Quick keys Push to change corresponding ventilator setting. Turn the ComWheel to
make a change. Push the Quick key or ComWheel to activate the
change.
8 ↑ O2 key Push to deliver increased FiO2 for 2 minutes.
9 Lock/Unlock Push to lock or unlock the touchscreen. When the touchscreen is
locked touch points are inactive.
Figure 2-8 • Controls and indicators
2-12 M1205553
Menu keys
10
3
4
9
5
8
AB.98.214
7 6
1 Alarms Setup Used to view and adjust the alarm limits as well as the volume of
the audible alarm.
2 Help Use to view information about alarms.
3 Trends Used to view historical patient data and ventilator settings either
numerically or graphically.
4 Take Snapshot Used to record the waveforms, alarms, and measured and set
values. A maximum of ten snapshots can be stored in memory.
5 System Setup Used to view system status and access various setup menus.
6 Spirometry Used to view patient ventilation data graphically in the form of
loops based on pressure, flow, and volume data.
7 Vent Setup Used to select ventilation mode and adjust all ventilation settings
for each mode.
8 Procedures Used to select specific procedures such as Intrinsic PEEP and P
0.1.
9 Nebulizer Used to select patient nebulization settings.
10 Standby Used to place the ventilator in Standby mode and to start
ventilation when the system is in Standby mode.
Figure 2-9 • Menu keys
M1205553 2-13
Ventilator display
There are two display interfaces to choose from: Full and Basic.
To select or change the display interface:
1. Push the ComWheel when no menus are shown.
• The Select Layout menu displays.
2. Select Full or Basic.
3. Select Previous Menu or push Normal Screen.
Screen configuration To change the ventilator display:

1. Push System Setup.
2. Select Screen Setup.
3. Select field to be changed.
4. Select parameter to be displayed.
5. Select Previous Menu when complete.
2-14 M1205553
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
Adult
cmH2O
Ppeak PEEPe
Pmean Pplat
Leak %
MVexp RR /min
8
TVexp ml FiO2 %
EtCO2 %s VCO2 ml/min
volume controlled ventilation Compl Raw

FiO2 TV Rate Tinsp PEEP Pmax ml/ cmH2O cmH2O/ l/s
% ml /min s cmH2O cmH2O
AB.98.327
10 9
1 Alarm silence symbol Displays the time remaining during an alarm silence or alarm
and countdown suspend period.
2 Alarm message fields Alarms will appear in order of priority. See “Alarms and
Troubleshooting” for more information on alarm behavior.
3 Waveform fields The top two waveforms are permanently set to Paw and Flow. The
third waveform may be selected as CO2, O2, Vol, Paux, or Off.
4 General message fields Displays informational messages.
5 Lock icon Indicates the touchscreen is locked. Press the lock/unlock menu
key to unlock the touchscreen.
6 Clock The time may be set in 12 or 24 hour format in the Time and Date
menu.
7 Patient type icon Displays Neonatal, Pediatric, or Adult patient type mode.
8 Measured value fields Displays current measured values corresponding to the
waveforms.
9 Digit field Displays information related to Volume, CO2, O2, Compliance,
Metabolics, Spirometry, Current mode, Spontaneous ventilation, or
Volume per Weight.
10 Ventilator settings Displays several of the settings for the current mode of ventilation.
Figure 2-10 • Full or Normal Screen view
M1205553 2-15
1 2 3 4
5
6 Adult
Airway Pressure Measured Pressures (cmH2O) Measured Oxygen
cmH2O
Peak Pressure PEEPe FiO2 %
6
Pmax
Off
7
Off
10
Measured Volumes Measured Rate

7
Minute Volume l/min Tidal Volume ml Respiratory Rate /min
AB.98.013
Off
9 8
pressure controlled ventilation - volume guaranteed Current Mode
FiO2 Rate Tinsp PEEP Pmax
PCV-VG
TV
To select another mode press:
Vent Setup button.
9 8
1 Alarm silence symbol Displays the time remaining during an alarm silence or alarm suspend
and countdown period.
2 Alarm message Alarms will appear in order of priority. See “Alarms and
fields Troubleshooting” for more information on alarm behavior.
3 General message Displays informational messages.
fields
4 Clock The time may be set in 12 or 24 hour format in the Time and Date
menu.
5 Patient type icon Displays Neonatal, Pediatric, or Adult patient type mode.
6 Trigger icon Displays patient’s inspiratory triggered breaths.
7 Measured value Displays current measured values corresponding to the waveforms.
fields
8 Digit field Displays current mode of ventilation.
9 Ventilator settings Displays several of the settings for the current mode of ventilation.
10 Pressure bargraph Displays patient’s real-time airway pressure.
Figure 2-11 • Basic Screen view
2-16 M1205553
cmH2O
1
Ppeak PEEPe
Pmean Pplat
Leak %
MVexp RR /min
TVexp ml FiO2 %
EtCO2 %s VCO2 ml/min
volume controlled ventilation Compl Raw

FiO2 TV Rate Tinsp PEEP Pmax ml/ cmH2O cmH2O/ l/s
AB.98.223
1. Menu
2. Waveform fields
Figure 2-12 • Menu view
When a menu key is selected the waveform fields start at the right
edge of the menu. The entire waveform is always displayed.
When the information in the measured data field is invalid, the
numbers will be displayed as ‘---’.
M1205553 2-17
Using menus
Menu functionality is common across the ventilator interface. The
following describes how to navigate through and select menu
functions.
1 2
Patient Setup
Checkout 3
Start Ventilation
Standby
Monitoring Only
Non-invasive
6 Patient Weight
Patient ID
Vent Setup 4
Vent Preferences
Enter patient's identification code. 5
1. Menu title AB.91.302
2. Present selection
3. Adjustment window
4. Submenu
5. Short instructions
6. Menu selections
Figure 2-13 • Example menu
1. Push a menu key to display the corresponding menu.

2. Turn the ComWheel counterclockwise to highlight the next menu
item. Turn the ComWheel clockwise to highlight the previous
menu item.
3. Push the ComWheel to enter the adjustment window or a
submenu.
4. Turn the ComWheel clockwise or counterclockwise to highlight
the desired selection. Push the ComWheel to confirm the
selection.
5. Select Normal Screen in the menu or push the Normal Screen
key to exit the menu and return to the normal ventilation display.
(Select Previous Menu to return to the last displayed menu, if
available.)
2-18 M1205553
System menus
The following is a list of the menu selections available. For functional
descriptions of menu items, refer to “Operation” or “Theory of
Operation.”
Menu selections shown below are the factory default values. The
additional settings are to the right of the menu item.
Menus display all available options.
Note See “Neonatal option” in Section 13 for neonatal settings,
specifications, and procedures.
See “Non-invasive option” in Section 14 for NIV and nCPAP settings,
specifications, and procedures.
Select Patient menu The Select Patient menu displays upon system start up. The default
patient type is indicated by an arrow. Use the Select Patient menu to
select patient type: Adult, Pediatric, or Neonatal; enter Patient
Weight; and access the Checkout menu or choose not to perform
Checkout by selecting the Bypass Checkout menu.
To change the patient type, the system must be powered Off.
The patient weight entered by the user will determine initial

Respiratory Rate and Tidal Volume settings. Selecting Checkout will
perform Checkout and selecting Bypass Checkout will display the
Patient Setup menu.
Select Patient
Patient Type:
Adult
Pediatric
Neonatal
Patient Weight 70 kg 5 to 200 kg (10 to 440 lb) for Ped and Adult
Checkout
Bypass Checkout
M1205553 2-19
System Setup menu Push System Setup to access additional system setup menus and
their corresponding settings. See “Installation Mode” in Section 10 for
more detailed information describing the Install/Service menu.
System Setup
Patient Setup
Screen Setup
Neo Flow Sensor Setup
Parameters Setup
System Status
Data Transfer Setup
Install/Service See “Installation Mode,” Section 10.
Normal Screen
Patient Setup menu Push System Setup and select Patient Setup to access the
Patient Setup menu. Use this menu to access the Checkout menu,
Vent Setup menu, and Vent Preferences menu. Select the
corresponding menu item(s) to access the desired settings. Use the
ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Select Previous Menu or
push Normal Screen to Exit.
Patient Setup
Checkout
Start Ventilation
Standby
Monitoring Only
Non-invasive Off On, Off, nCPAP
Patient Weight 70 kg 5 to 200 kg (10 to 440 lb) for Ped and Adult
Patient ID
Vent Setup
Vent Preferences
Previous Menu
2-20 M1205553
Checkout menu Push System Setup - Patient Setup - Checkout to access the
Checkout menu. Use this menu to start and stop a checkout
procedure, delete patient trends, view the Checkout log, and to
access and view Checkout Help. Use the ComWheel to scroll and
confirm settings. Push Normal Screen to Exit or select Patient
Setup to access the Patient Setup menu.
Checkout
Start Check
Stop Check
Delete Trends Yes Yes or No
Check Log
Check Help
Patient Setup
Standby Push Standby to access the Standby menu. Use this menu to place
the system in Standby or Start Ventilation from standby, activate
Monitoring Only, or use the Park Circuit procedure.
See “Performing Procedures” in Section 4 for detailed information.
Standby
Start Ventilation
Standby
Monitoring Only
Park Circuit
Normal Screen
M1205553 2-21
Vent Setup menu Push Vent Setup to access the Vent Setup menu. Select Adjust
Settings to adjust settings for the selected ventilation mode. Select
Backup Mode to adjust settings for the selected Backup mode or to
change the Backup ventilation mode. Use the ComWheel to scroll
and confirm settings. Push Normal Screen to Exit.
Vent Setup
Adjust Settings
Backup Mode
Mode:
VCV
PCV
PCV-VG
SIMV-VC
SIMV-PC
BiLevel
CPAP/PSV
SIMV-PCVG*
*SIMV-PCVG or BiLevel-VG modes will display in this location if they are installed.
NIV Setup menu Push System Setup - Patient Setup - Non-invasive. Select On
then select Vent Setup to access the NIV Setup menu. Use the
ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Push Normal Screen to
Exit.
NIV Setup
FiO2 50 21 to 100%
PEEP 3 2 to 20 cmH2O
Psupp 5 0 to 30 cmH2O
Trigger 6 1 to 9 l/min, -10 to -0.25 cmH2O
Rise Time 200 0-500 ms
End Flow 25 5 to 80%
Tsupp 4 0.25 to 4.0 s
Bias Flow 8 8 to 20 l/min
Minimum Rate 10 0 to 40 /min
Backup Pinsp 5 1 to 30 cmH2O
Backup Tinsp 1.7 0.25 to 5.0 s
2-22 M1205553
Vent Preferences
Vent Preferences menu Push System Setup and select Patient Setup - Vent Preferences
to access the Vent Preferences menu. Use this menu to access the
Backup Mode and ARC menus, and set Vent settings. Use the
Vent Preferences
Backup Mode
ARC
Assist Control On On or Off
Leak Compensation Off On or Off
Trigger Compensation Off On or Off
TV Based on ATPD ATPD or BTPS
Previous Menu
Backup Mode menu Push System Setup and select Patient Setup - Vent Preferences
- Backup Mode - Adjust Settings to change settings for the selected
Backup ventilation mode or to change the Backup ventilation mode.
Use the ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Select Previous
Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit.
Backup Mode
Adjust Settings
Mode:
VCV
PCV
PCV-VG
SIMV-VC
SIMV-PC
BiLevel
SIMV-PCVG*
Previous Menu
M1205553 2-23
ARC Push System Setup and select Patient Setup - Vent Preferences
- ARC to access the ARC menu. Use this menu to select
endotracheal and tracheal tube compensation, tube diameter, and
level of flow compensation. Use the ComWheel to scroll and confirm
settings. Select Previous Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit
ARC
Endotrach. Tube Off On or Off
Trach. Tube Off On or Off
Diameter 7.5 5 to 10 mm
Compensation 35 25 to 100%
Previous Menu
2-24 M1205553
Screen Setup
Screen Setup menu Push System Setup and select Screen Setup to access the
Screen Setup menu. Use the Screen Setup menu to change
waveform settings, digit field values, split screen views, sweep speed,
brightness, and access the Favorites Setup and Select Layout
menus.
Wavefield 3 may be set to: Off, CO2, O2, Vol, or Paux. Wavefields 1
and 2 cannot be changed. Wavefield 1 will always display Paw
(airway pressure) and Wavefield 2 will always display Flow.
Select Digit Field to display information in the bottom right corner of
the display.
Select Split Screen to display information to the left of the
waveforms.
Select Favorites Setup to turn the Favorites Bar On or Off and add
up to seven favorite functions or procedures to the Favorites Bar.
Sweep Speed is the rate at which the waveform is re-drawn across
the screen. Select Fast or Slow to set waveform sweep speed.
Select Brightness to adjust the brightness of the screen. Brightness
levels may be set from 1 to 5, level 5 being the brightest.
Screen Setup
Wave Field 1 Paw
Wave Field 2 Flow
Wave Field 3 Vol Off, CO2, O2, Vol or Paux
Digit Field Compl Vol, CO2, O2, Compl, Spiro, EE/RQ,
VO2, Vol/Wt, Mode, or Spont
Split Screen None None, Spiro, SBT, Trend, Paw or
SpiroD
Favorites Setup On On, Off
Sweep Speed Fast Fast or Slow
Brightness 4 1 to 5
Select Layout
Previous Menu
M1205553 2-25
Favorites Setup menu Push System Setup and select Screen Setup - Favorites to
access the Favorites Setup menu.
Use Select Favorites to add up to seven favorite functions and
procedures to the menu bar. Use the ComWheel to scroll through the
functions and procedures, turn selections on or off, and confirm the
setting.
Note Select the Favorites Setup function to use as a shortcut to setup the
Favorites Bar.
Use Favorites Bar to display the Favorites Bar while using the
touchscreen. Use the ComWheel to select on or off and confirm the
setting.
Select Previous Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit.
Favorites Favorites Setup

Select Favorites
Favorites Bar On Manual Breath On Backup Mode On
Previous Menu Intrinsic PEEP Off ARC Off
Suction Off Apnea Time Off
Inspiratory Hold Off Alarm History On
Expiratory Hold Off Data Source Off
SBT On FRC INview Off
Lung Mechanics On SpiroDynamics Off
P 0.1 Off Non-invasive Off
NIF Off PEEP INview Off
Vital Capacity Off Vent Calcs Off
Patient Setup Off Favorites Setup On
Vent Preferences On
2-26 M1205553
Select Layout menu Push System Setup and select Screen Setup - Select Layout or
push the ComWheel when no menus are shown to access the
Select Layout menu. Use the Select Layout menu to choose the Full
user interface or the Basic user interface.
Use the Select Layout menu to select All or Selected vent modes. If
All is selected, all ventilation modes will be available. If Selected is
set, only the Super User selected ventilation modes will be available.
See Section 10 for more information on using the Selected Modes
menu. Use the ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Select
Previous Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit.
Select Layout
Screen:
Full
Basic
Vent Modes:
All
Selected
Previous Menu
M1205553 2-27
Parameters Setup Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup to access the
Parameters Setup menu. Use the Parameters Setup menu to select
the system data source and access the Scaling, CO2 Setup, O2
Setup, Paux Setup, Spirometry Setup, Gas Exchange Setup, and
Gas Calibration menus.
Parameters Setup menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Data Source
to change the primary system data source to Vent or Mod (airway
module). Select Previous Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit.
Parameters Setup
Data Source Vent Vent or Mod
Scaling
CO2 Setup
O2 Setup
Paux Setup
Spirometry Setup
Gas Exchange Setup
Gas Calibration
Previous Menu
Scaling menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Scaling to
change loop scaling to AUTO, Linked, or Independent. Auto will
change scales to automatically accommodate the waveform size.
When Auto scaling occurs a message will display in the waveform
field. If Linked is selected Flow, Volume, and Paw waveform scales
will all change accordingly. If Indep is selected Flow, Volume, and
Paw scales can be changed independently. Use the ComWheel to
scroll and confirm settings. Select Previous Menu or push Normal
Screen to Exit.
Scaling
Scaling AUTO AUTO, Linked or Indep
Vol Scale 1200 60 to 2400 for Ped, 300 to 4000 for Adult
Paw Scale 40 6 to 120 for Ped, 10 to 140 for Adult
Flow Scale 60 6 to 120 for Ped, 15 to 200 for Adult
Previous Menu
2-28 M1205553
CO2 Setup menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - CO2 Setup to
(compact airway module access the CO2 Setup menu. Use this menu to change scale range
required) for the CO2 waveform and quickly access the CO2 alarm limits. Use
the ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Select Previous Menu
or push Normal Screen to Exit
CO2 Setup
Scale 6% AUTO, or 6 to 20%
CO2 Alarm
Previous Menu
O2 Setup menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - O2 Setup to
(compact airway module access the O2 Setup menu. Use this menu to change scale range for
required) the O2 waveform. Use Auto, or DIFF6 to DIFF30, 10-60%, or 100% to
change the size of the O2 waveform by changing the scale height.
Select O2 Alarm to quickly access the O2 alarm limits. Use the
push Normal Screen to Exit
O2 Setup
Scale 100% AUTO, or DIFF6 to DIFF30, 10-60%,
100%
O2 Alarm
Previous Menu
M1205553 2-29
Paux Setup menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Paux Setup
to access the Paux Setup menu. Use this menu to change scale
range for the auxiliary pressure waveform.
See “Auxiliary Pressure” in Section 3 for detailed information on using
the Paux Setup menu.
Select Paux Alarm to quickly access the Paux alarm limits. Use the
Paux Setup
Scale 40 Auto, 6 to 120 for Ped, 10 to 140 for
Adult
Purge Flow Off Off or On
Paux Zero
Paux Alarm
Previous Menu
2-30 M1205553
Spirometry Setup menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Spirometry
Setup to access the Spirometry Setup menu.
Select Sensor Type to choose Adult (D-lite sensor) or Pediatric
(Pedi-lite sensor).
Select Loop Type to display the Paw-Vol, Flow-Vol, or Paw-Flow
loop type. Select TV (Tidal Volume) or MV (Minute Volume) to
change the volume shown on the Spirometry split screen.
Select Split Screen to display information to the left of the
waveforms. If None is selected full length waveforms will display.
Select Lower Spiro Split Screen to display measured values or a
second loop in the spirometry split screen. See “Lower spiro split
screen” in Section 4 for detailed information.
Select Paw Alarm or MVexp Alarm to quickly access the alarm
limits. Use the ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Select
Previous Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit.
Spirometry Setup
Sensor Type Adult Adult or Pedi
Loop Type P-V P-V, F-V, P-F
TV or MV TV TV or MV
Split Screen None None, Spiro, SBT, Trend, Paw, or
SpiroD
Lower Spiro Split Screen Digits Digits, P-V, F-V, P-F
Paw Alarm
MVexp Alarm
Previous Menu
M1205553 2-31
Gas Exchange Setup Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Gas
menu (compact airway Exchange Setup to access the Gas Exchange Setup menu. Use this
module required) menu to set patient height, weight, and BSA (Body Surface Area).
Important The Energy Expenditure (EE) Average Time entered only changes
the amount of time displayed in the EE/RQ Digit field. The value does
not reflect the length in time the EE value is averaged. EE is
calculated breath to breath, regardless of the EE average Time set.
Gas Exchange Setup

EE Average Time 2h 2, 6, 12, 24h
Patient Height 5 to 98 in, 15 to 250 cm
Patient Weight 5 to 200 kg (10 to 440 lb)
BSA 0.1 to 3.74 m2
Previous Menu
Gas Calibration menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Gas
(compact airway module Calibration to access the Gas Calibration menu. Use this menu to
required) calibrate the airway module gases. Last Calibration: will display the
date of the last airway module calibration. Use the ComWheel to
Screen to Exit
Gas Calibration
CO2 Zero
O2 Zero
Previous Menu
Last Calibration:
2-32 M1205553
Data Transfer Setup

Data Transfer Setup Push System Setup and select Data Transfer Setup to access the
menu Data Transfer Setup menu. Use the Data Transfer menu to select
desired data to download from the ventilator to the PC such as:
waveforms, numerics, and measurements. Use the ComWheel to
Screen to Exit.
See “EView” in Section 15 for detailed information.
Data Transfer Setup

Data to Transfer:
Snapshots
Vent Data
Time Period 4 hr 15 min to 7 day (variable increments)
Sample Interval 15 min Breath, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30
min, 60 min
Waveforms On On or Off
Patients All All or Current
Previous Menu
Spirometry menus
Spirometry menu Push Spirometry to access the Spirometry menu. Use the
Spirometry menu to display spirometry loop types, activate the
cursor, and access the Scaling menu, Spiro Setup menu, FRC Inview
menu, and SpiroDynamics menu. Use the ComWheel to scroll and
confirm settings. Push Normal Screen to Exit.
See “INview Ventilation Tools” in Section 12 for descriptions of FRC
Inview and SpiroDynamics menus and settings.
Spirometry
Loop Type P-V P-V, F-V, or P-F
Cursor
Scaling
Spiro Setup
Save Loop
Reference Loop None None or time of saved loops
Erase Loop None None or time of saved loops
FRC INview
SpiroDynamics
Normal Screen
M1205553 2-33
Procedures menus
Procedures menu Push Procedures to access the Procedures menu. Use the
Procedures menu to access the Lung Mechanics and Spontaneous
Breathing Trial menus, activate the Suction procedure, Intrinsic PEEP
measurement, and the Inspiratory and Expiratory Hold procedures.
Use the ComWheel to scroll and confirm settings. Push Normal
Screen to Exit.
See “Procedures” in Section 4 for detailed information.
Procedures
Manual Breath
Suction
Lung Mechanics
Intrinsic PEEP
PEEPi Volume
Inspiratory Hold
Inspiratory Hold Time 5 2 to 15 s
Expiratory Hold
Expiratory Hold Time 5 2 to 20 s
Spont. Breath. Trial
Normal Screen
Lung Mechanics menu Push Procedures and select Lung Mechanics to access the Lung
Mechanics menu. Use this menu to activate a P 0.1 procedure,
activate the NIF procedure, set NIF time, and activate the Vital
Capacity procedure. Use the ComWheel to scroll and confirm
settings. Select Previous Menu or push Normal Screen to Exit.
Lung Mechanics
P 0.1
NIF
NIF Time 5 1 to 30 s
Vital Capacity
Previous Menu
2-34 M1205553
SBT menu Push Procedures and select Spont. Breath. Trial to access the
SBT menu. Use this menu to adjust SBT settings, set the length of
time for a SBT trial, manually end the SBT trial, adopt SBT settings
for standard ventilation, and change the Split Screen display. Use the
SBT
Adjust Settings
Time 30 2 to 120 min
Start
Stop
Adopt Settings
Split Screen None None, Spiro, SBT, Trend, Paw, or
SpiroD
Previous Menu
Nebulizer menu Push Nebulizer to access the Nebulizer menu.

See “Electronic micropump nebulizer” in Section 3 for detailed
information.
See “Pneumatic nebulizer” in Section 4 for detailed information.
Screen to Exit.
Nebulizer
Start
Stop
Volume 3.0 2.5, 3.0, 5.0, or 6.0 ml
Time 15 10, 15, 20, or 30 min
Cycles 1 1 to 10
Pause Time 1 min 30 s to 8 hr (variable increments)
Next Start
Pneumatic Nebulizer
Normal Screen
M1205553 2-35
Alarms Setup menu Push Alarms Setup to access the Alarms Setup menu. Use this
menu to adjust limits, and view Alarm History. Use the ComWheel to
Screen to Exit.
Alarms Setup
Adjust Limits
Auto Limits
Default Limits
Leak Limit 50 10 to 90%, Off
Apnea Time 30 10 to 60 s for Ped and Adult**
Alarm Volume 3 1 to 5
High Alert Audio 30 0, 10, 20, 30 (s), or Off
Tdisconnect 30 0 to 60 s
Patient Effort 50 40 to 120 s
Alarm History
Previous Menu
**Off available in NIV.
Trends menu Push Trends to access the Trends menu. Use this menu to activate
the cursor, select trend pages, view graphical, snapshot, measured
trends, and settings. Time Scale sets the time duration on each trend
page. Select Vent Calculations to access menus used to
automatically calculate and view patient lab data and history. See
“Performing Vent Calculations” in Section 4 for more information.
Screen to Exit.
Trends
Cursor
Next Page
Previous Page
View:
Graphical
Snapshot
Measured
Settings
Time Scale 2 hr 12 min, 1 to 72 h
Vent Calculations
Normal Screen
2-36 M1205553
In this section General use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Module bay connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Gas supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Communication port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Electronic micropump nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Auxiliary pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Remote mount display arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Humidifier mount (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Support arm (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Isolated electrical outlets (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
EVair 03 compressor (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
M1205553 3-1
General use
WARNING Use of portable phones or other radio frequency (RF)

emitting equipment near the system may cause
unexpected or adverse operation. Monitor operation when
RF emitters are in the vicinity.
w Use of other electrical equipment on or near this system

may cause interference. Verify normal operation of
equipment in your configuration before use on patients.
w Do not attach a gas scavenging system or other

accessories to the gas exhaust port. Occluding the gas
exhaust port will prevent proper ventilation of the patient.
w Adding attachments or other components to the breathing

system may increase the inspiratory or expiratory
resistance. Ensure the inspiratory and expiratory
resistances do not exceed 6 cmH2O for the following
flows:
• 60 l/min for adult use
• 30 l/min for pediatric use
• 5 l/min for neonatal use
w Ensure system batteries are fully charged prior to use.
CAUTION Use only cables and accessories approved by

Datex-Ohmeda. Other cables and accessories may
damage the system or interfere with measurement.
Single-use accessories are not designed to be reused.
w Datex-Ohmeda strongly recommends the use of at least

two gas sources during clinical use.
3-2 M1205553
Attaching the Facility defaults for various parameters may be set in the Installation
breathing circuit mode. See “Installation Mode” in Section 10 for more information.
Connect the patient circuit, including the humidifier (if used), patient
wye (Y-piece), water trap, and filters as shown.
Important Consult your hospital guidelines for proper use of expiratory filters in
conjunction with heated humidifiers.
INSP EXP
7 1
6 2
AB.98.079
3 4
AB.98.288
5
1. Expiratory inlet
2. Expiratory filter (optional)
3. Expiratory water trap (optional)
4. Patient wye (Y-piece)
5. Humidifier (optional)
6. Inspiratory filter (recommended)
7. Inspiratory outlet
Figure 3-1 • Patient circuit connections
Note Datex-Ohmeda recommends the use of an inspiratory filter at all

times and an expiratory water trap when an active humidifier without
a heated expiratory limb is used.
M1205553 3-3
Power connection
The power cord is connected on the back of the ventilator as shown.
The input power is less than 200 W.
AB.98.325
3-4 M1205553
Module bay connection

The module bay may be mounted on either side of the ventilator.
1. Lock the casters.
2. Connect one end of the cable to the module bay connection on
the back of the ventilator, and tighten the screws.
3. Attach the module bay to the desired side of the ventilator.
• Loosen the thumbscrews.
• Slide the module bay behind the thumbscrews and tighten.
4. Insert the cable into the retaining channel by starting at the inside
edge and pushing the remainder of the cable through.
5. Connect the other end of the cable to the module bay connection,
and tighten the screws.
6. Ensure there is enough excess cable on the end of the module
bay to allow full movement of the module bay.
4 5 6
3
2
AB.98.078
1
1. Thumbscrew
2. Excess cable
3. Module bay connection
4. Retaining channel
5. Module bay cable
6. Ventilator module bay connection
Figure 3-2 • Module bay connection
M1205553 3-5
Gas supply connections
WARNING Use only gas supply hoses that meet ISO5359 standard.
CAUTION Use only clean and dry medical oxygen and air supplies.
The oxygen and air supply connections are located on the back of the
ventilator. The air supply connection is on the left and the oxygen
supply connection is on the right, as labelled on the ventilator.
The Engström comes with a standard Air pipeline inlet assembly
which includes a filter bowl, o-ring, and filter element. The O2 pipeline
inlet assembly is an orderable part. See “Parts” in Section 9 for
additional information.
1 2
AB.98.055
1. Air supply connection
2. Oxygen supply connection
3-6 M1205553
Communication port
WARNING Port 4 interface cables must be shielded.

See “Electrical safety” section of “Specifications” in Section 11 for
precautions on connecting to this communications port.
Port 4 The Port 4 connector allows serial input/output of commands and

Communication data. The 15 pin connector is located on the back of the ventilator,
and labelled as port 4. The output protocol is available at
www.datex-ohmeda.com or by contacting Datex-Ohmeda.
AB.98.078
1. Port 4
1
9
5
13
6
AB.98.180
The 15-pin female D connector - Data Communications Equipment
(DCE) configuration:
• Pin 1 - monitor On/Standby
• Pin 5 - ground
• Pin 6 - display unit receive
• Pin 9 - monitor On/Standby return
• Pin 13 - display unit transmit
M1205553 3-7
Nurse call Port 4 may also be used to output alarm signals to a nurse call
system. The ventilator will signal an alarm with a normally open or
normally closed signal.
Note Only systems with the neonatal option or systems with serial number
CBCK00357 or higher have the nurse call functionality.
The nurse call will be triggered by all medium and high priority
alarms. When alarms are suspended, the nurse call will not be
signalled. If an alarm is silenced, the nurse call signal will turn off.
WARNING The ventilator should be used as the primary source of

alarm information. The nurse call system enables the
availability of ventilator alarm information at a secondary
location. The appropriate audio alarm levels must be
maintained on the ventilator regardless of a connection to
a nurse call system.
10
3
11
AB.98.180
The 15-pin female D connector configuration:
• pin 3 - relay common
• pin 10 - normally open
• pin 11 - normally closed
Load current:
• Minimum: 100 uA at 100 mVdc
• Maximum: 1 A at 30 Vdc
• Relay isolated
3-8 M1205553
Electronic micropump nebulizer

The Aeroneb Professional Nebulizer System (Aeroneb Pro) by
Aerogen, Inc. is integrated into the Engström.
The Aeroneb Pro is designed to operate in-line with standard
ventilator circuits and mechanical ventilators in acute and subacute
care environments. It operates without changing the patient ventilator
parameters and can be refilled without interrupting ventilation.
The nebulizer may be used with a neonatal, pediatric, or adult
breathing circuit. The T-adapter for the nebulizer is specific to the
breathing circuit type.
CAUTION Datex-Ohmeda strongly recommends the use of an

expiratory filter when a nebulizer is used to help protect
the expiratory flow sensor.
WARNING Use of a heat-moisture exchanger in the breathing circuit

can substantially increase flow resistance when a
nebulizer is active.
w Do not use a heat-moisture exchanger or heat-moisture

exchanger filter between the nebulizer and the patient
airway.
w The Engström is matched to the Aeroneb Pro for optimum

performance. Use of external pneumatic nebulizers in
certain modes will result in alteration of volume, triggering,
and may produce alarm conditions unless Pneumatic
Nebulizer Flow Compensation is used. See “Pneumatic
nebulizer” in Section 4.
M1205553 3-9
Assembling the 1. Connect the nebulizer to the T-adapter by pushing the nebulizer
nebulizer firmly onto the adapter.
AB.98.281
2. Connect the nebulizer and T-adapter into the inspiratory limb of
the breathing circuit before the patient wye.
AB.98.283
WARNING Always maintain the nebulizer in a vertical orientation
while in the patient circuit. This orientation helps prevent
patient secretions and condensate from contaminating the
aerosol generator of the nebulizer and ensures proper
nebulization.
3. Attach the connector to the nebulizer connection as shown,
matching the red dots.
INSP EXP
AB.98.284
4. Complete a system Checkout prior to use on a patient.

5. Follow the nebulizer procedure in Section 4 “Operation”.
3-10 M1205553
Filling the nebulizer
CAUTION To help avoid damage to the nebulizer, do not use a

syringe with a needle.
w The maximum capacity of the nebulizer is 10 ml. Do not

fill the nebulizer beyond the maximum fill indication point.
The underside of the filler cap represents maximum fill
indication point.
1. Open the filler cap tab on the nebulizer.
AB.98.285
2. Use a prefilled nebule or syringe to inject the medication into the
filler port.
AB.98.295
3. Close the filler cap tab.
Disassembling the The nebulizer and T-adapter may remain in the patient circuit when
nebulizer not in use. The nebulizer may be removed from the T-adapter and
replaced with a plug to avoid leaks.
1. To remove the connector, grasp it close to the ventilator and pull
straight out.
2. Remove the nebulizer and T-adapter from the inspiratory limb of
the patient breathing circuit. Reconnect the circuit.
3. Clean and sterilize the nebulizer and T-adapter as described in
Section 7 “Cleaning and Maintenance.”
M1205553 3-11
Disposable nebulizer The Solo Nebulizer (Aeroneb Solo) by Aerogen, Inc. is integrated into
the Engström.
The Aeroneb Solo is a disposable nebulizer and offers the user a
choice of a disposable single patient solution. The Aeroneb Solo can
be used with Neonatal, Pediatric, and Adult patients. The Solo
nebulizer operates in-line like the Aeroneb Pro, utilizing the Engström
Nebulizer menu and nebulizer cable.
Note The Aeroneb Solo is a disposable and should not be cleaned or
reused after single patient use.
3-12 M1205553
Auxiliary pressure
Auxiliary pressure is a supplementary pressure measurement that
can be displayed with a waveform and numerics.
1. Attach tubing to the auxiliary pressure port as shown, sliding
tubing over barbed end of port. The internal diameter of the
tubing can range from 1/8 in (3 mm) to 1/4 in (6 mm).
AB.98.313
2. To display the Paux waveform follow the instructions in “Screen
configuration” in section 2.
3. To disconnect, grasp the tubing and pull straight off of the barb.
Purging of tubing Monitoring lines may become clogged and effect performance. To
purge the line complete the following steps.
WARNING Purge Flow will deliver 35 ± 15 ml/min of air. Do not

initiate Purge Flow when the Paux port is connected to a
closed system such as an endotracheal cuff.
1. Disconnect the patient end of the tubing.
3. Select Parameters Setup - Paux Setup - Purge Flow - On to
begin flow. The auxiliary pressure port is protected to 100 cmH2O
to prevent overpressuring the tubing.
4. Select Off to end flow.
5. Reconnect the patient end of the tubing.
M1205553 3-13
Zeroing Auxiliary pressure measurements will be more accurate if the

pressure is zeroed before use.
2. Select Parameters Setup - Paux Setup - Paux Zero.
3. When complete, Done will appear next to Paux Zero.
When using auxiliary pressure with the purge flow continuously on,
the pressure should be zeroed with Purge Flow On. This will ensure
that any pressure offset caused by the monitoring line resistance will
be accounted for.
3-14 M1205553
Exhalation valve heater

Use the exhalation valve heater to prevent moisture.
1. Attach and tighten cable to Port 2 or 3 on the back of the
ventilator.
AB.98.314
Note Order cable separately. See “Exhalation valve heater” in Section 9.
2. Thread the cable though the rear channel to the front of the
ventilator.
AB.98.317
3. Angle the cover over the exhalation valve housing and gently
press into place.
AB.98.320
4. Align and match the red dots from the exhalation valve heater
cable to the power cable and snap together.
AB.98.321
M1205553 3-15
Remote mount display arm

The remote mount display arm is intended for use only with Engström
Ventilators. If your Engström is not equipped with the remote arm it
may be ordered separately.
WARNING A movable part or a removable component may present a

pinch or crush hazard. Use care when moving or
replacing system parts and components.
To remove the display arm:
1. Power down the Engström and lock casters if using an Engström
Cart.
2. Position the display arm so that it is vertical and the display unit
so that it is horizontal (screen facing up).
3. Firmly hold the display unit at the junction of the display arm and
display screen. Open the primary latch (1). Pull and hold the
secondary latch (2) toward the front of the arm assembly to
disengage the display unit.
AB.98.296
AB.98.297
1
4. Carefully lift and remove the display unit from the ventilator.
Important The Display Unit is top heavy when removed from the ventilator.
3-16 M1205553
To mount the display unit to a 10x25 mm, ISO 19054 Rail System
(medi-rail):
Note Ensure cable length is sufficient to reach from Engström system to
the desired mounting location.
1. Align and seat the arm onto the rail system. Listen for an audible
click of the secondary latch.
2. Close the primary latch to secure the arm onto the rail system.
AB.98.304
AB.98.298
To replace the remote arm on the ventilator:
1. Firmly hold the display unit at the junction of the display arm and
display screen. Open the primary latch (1), then press and hold
the secondary release latch (2) to disengage the display unit from
the remote rail.
2
AB.98.299
2. Align the arm assembly with the receiver mount. Ensure the cable
is positioned in the cable channel of the receiver mount.
3. Ensure the primary latch is open and seat the arm assembly onto
the receiver mount. Listen for an audible click of the secondary
latch.
4. Close the primary latch to secure the arm assembly onto the
ventilator.
M1205553 3-17
Humidifier mount (optional)

The Engström is designed to work with active humidification.
Datex-Ohmeda does not recommend the use of a specific brand or
model of humidifier.
WARNING When adding attachments or other components to the

ventilator, the resistance to flow across the breathing
circuit may increase.
w A movable part or a removable component may present a

pinch or crush hazard. Use care when moving or
replacing system parts and components.
1. Unlock and remove the ventilator unit from the cart.
2. Slide the humidifier onto the humidifier mounting bracket.
AB.98.020
3. Guide the power cord through the rear channel on the cart.
AB.98.094
4. If a cord holder is attached to the top of the cart, place the power
cord on top of the square and bend the holder over to keep the
cord in place.
AB.98.018
3-18 M1205553
5. Replace the ventilator and lock onto the cart.

6. If the expiratory water trap will be used, slide the water trap onto
the bracket. Ensure the latch snaps into place.
AB.98.044
7. Plug the humidifier into the electrical outlet or other AC mains
power source.
8. Set the humidifier as directed in the manufacturer’s operation
manual.
Note To remove the expiratory water trap, squeeze the latch at the base of
the bracket and slide the trap up.
Refer to the humidifier manufacturer’s operation manual for
information on cleaning and maintenance.
WARNING When a filter is used in the exhalation limb in conjunction

with a water bath humidifier, a water trap should be
placed between the filter and the patient.
• Never position any filter in the inspiratory limb
downstream of a water bath humidifier.
• Do not use the filter between the patient and any
source of nebulized drugs.
• When nebulized drugs are administered, breathing
resistance should be monitored and the filter should
be replaced following standard hospital procedure.
M1205553 3-19
Support arm (optional)

The support arm may be placed on either side of the ventilator to
support the patient breathing circuit. To attach to the ventilator, place
the post into the arm holder and tighten the thumbscrew.
WARNING Do not exceed 2 kg load at patient end of support arm.

Important The support arm is not a sterile component and cannot be autoclaved
or immersed in cleaning solution.
To attach the arm:
1. Loosen thumbscrew.
2. Place post in the arm holder.
3. Tighten thumbscrew to hold arm in position.
AB.98.082
4
1. Patient side of support arm

2. Central tension handle
3. Post
4. Thumbscrew
Figure 3-3 • Support arm
To position the arm:

1. Loosen by turning the central tension handle counter-clockwise
while holding the patient side of the arm in the other hand.
Note There is a stop to prevent the central tension handle from being
completely loosened.
2. Move the arm to the desired position.
3. Tighten by turning the central tension handle clockwise.
3-20 M1205553
Isolated electrical outlets (optional)

The configuration of the electrical outlets varies by country.
4
AB.98.008
AB.98.049
1. Ventilator to outlet power cord
2. Outlet to AC mains power cord
3. Outlet to compressor power cord
4. Compressor to AC mains power cord
Figure 3-4 • Power cord routing with electrical outlets
WARNING Do not overload the electrical outlets.
Electrical outlet panel

ratings
Voltage Current
100 to 120 V 6A
220 to 240 V 4A
M1205553 3-21
EVair 03 compressor (optional)

The EVair 03 compressor is intended for use as an optional
accessory to Datex-Ohmeda critical care ventilators as a breathable
compressed air supply. The EVair compressor can act as the primary
air supply or as the backup air supply if pipeline air is connected to
the compressor. If the pipeline air pressure drops below 250 kPa (36
psi), the EVair automatically turns on to provide an air supply to the
ventilator.
The compressor has no alarm functions. All alarm functions and
reactions to failure of the compressed gas supply are provided by the
ventilator.
The compressor should be installed in the base of the ventilator cart.
The compressor is powered from AC mains.
If the compressor is the primary air supply to the system, ensure that
a compressed oxygen supply is also connected.
WARNING A compressor should be used if a reliable air pipeline

source is not available.
w Do not block air inlet or exhaust vents. Do not place near

a radiator or heating unit. Compressor may overheat and
shut down.
w The cooling air exhaust grill may become hot to the touch
during use.
w Do not use compressor in poorly ventilated area.

Compressor will produce heat when in use.
w Do not place the compressor near a source of airborne

contamination such as cleaning products or other
chemicals, vapors, odors, or exhaust gases. The
compressor uses air from its surroundings for delivery to
the ventilator and patient.
w If the compressor is the primary air supply to this system,

ensure that a compressed oxygen supply is also
connected.
3-22 M1205553
12
11
1
10
2
9 3
8
7 4
5
AB.98.002
6
1. Drain bottle
2. Compressor power switch
3. Pipeline pressure gauge
4. Accessory outlet (see warning below)
5. AC mains inlet
6. Air inlet filter
7. Hour meter
8. Drain outlet
9. Pipeline air inlet
10. Compressor air outlet (to ventilator)
11. Pump pressure gauge
12. Cooling air exhaust
Figure 3-5 • Controls on compressor
WARNING Use Datex-Ohmeda accessories only.

• Mains voltage is applied to the accessory outlet when
the compressor is connected to mains. To isolate from
mains, disconnect the compressor from the wall.
• Accessory outlet is not fused. Ensure accessory is
appropriately protected (maximum current draw for
120 V, 6 A; maximum current draw for 230 V, 4 A).
M1205553 3-23
Before each use Check to ensure the compressor is working properly. Complete these
steps:
1. Check the air inlet filter. Clean or replace as necessary. See to
the “Cleaning and Maintenance” Section 7 for instructions.
WARNING Failure to maintain the air inlet filter may cause the
compressor to overheat and shut down.
2. Check the drain bottle. Empty as necessary.
3. Connect the compressor power cord to a grounded AC mains
power outlet.
AB.98.049
AB.98.052
1. Ventilator to AC mains power cord

2. Ventilator to outlet power cord
3. Outlet to compressor power cord
4. Compressor to AC mains power cord
Figure 3-6 • Power cord routing with a compressor
4. If a pipeline hose is connected to the compressor pipeline air

inlet, temporarily disconnect it from the pipeline supply outlet.
5. Check to make sure an air hose is connected from the
compressor air outlet to the ventilator air inlet.
6. Discharge any air pressure in the compressor reservoir by
operating the ventilator on a test lung or temporarily
disconnecting the compressed air outlet hose at the ventilator
until the air pressure is depleted.
3-24 M1205553
7. Turn on the compressor power switch. The green indicator light

should turn on.
8. Make sure the compressor begins to run and the pump pressure
gauge stabilizes at 550 ± 50 kPa (80 ± 7.3 psi) within 30 seconds
after turning the power on.
9. If the compressor is to be used as a reserve for the air pipeline
supply, connect a hose from the compressor pipeline air inlet to
the pipeline medical air supply. The pipeline pressure gauge
should indicate 280 to 650 kPa (41 to 94 psi). The pump should
be in standby while the power switch light remains lit.
M1205553 3-25
3-26 M1205553
4 Operation
WARNING Ventilator alarms indicate potential hazard conditions. All

alarms that occur should be investigated to help ensure
adequate patient safety.
In this section Preparing the ventilator for a patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Pre-use checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Vent Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Starting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Entering Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Changing settings while ventilating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Using snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Viewing trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Viewing spirometry Loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Performing Vent Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Performing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
EVair 03 compressor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
M1205553 4-1
Preparing the ventilator for a patient
Turning on the 1. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet.
system • The green mains indicator on the display lights when AC
power is connected.
• The ventilator automatically switches to battery power if AC
power fails.
2. Turn the System switch On.
• A start-up screen appears while the ventilator is booting up
and completing self tests.
• Once the self tests pass, the system is in Standby and the
display shows the Select Patient menu. This should occur
within 60 seconds.
• If the self tests fail, the display shows an alarm. See “Alarms
and Troubleshooting” in Section 6 for assistance.
• Ensure that two distinctly different audio alarm tones sound
to ensure the backup audio buzzer is working.
• Ensure alarm LEDs blink.
• Ensure all water traps and filters are clean prior to using the
ventilator.
WARNING The ventilator is equipped with a backup audio buzzer. If

both the primary and backup audio tones do not sound
when the ventilator is powered up, take the ventilator out
of service and contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
representative.
w Ensure system batteries are fully charged prior to use.
4-2 M1205553
4 Operation
Select Patient Patient type may be set to either Adult, Pediatric, or Neonatal.
Selecting a value will change the ventilation settings to the facility
defaults for that patient type. The Patient Type selection is used
internally by the ventilator to match the pneumatic response to a
particular patient type.
Only settings for the selected patient type will be accessible. The
system must be turned off and turned on again to select a new patient
type and settings.
1. Select Adult, Pediatric, or Neonatal.
2. Enter Patient Weight.
• See Patient Weight table for TV and Rate calculations.
• The Patient Weight entered should be the patient’s ideal
body weight.
3. Select Checkout or Bypass Checkout.
• Select Checkout to run pre-use checkout, then select the
Patient Setup menu.
• Select Bypass Checkout to access the Patient Setup menu
without running the pre-use checkout.
Important If Bypass Checkout is selected, the Checkout procedure will not be
performed and the system will use the compliance and resistance
data from the last completed Checkout procedure.
Patient weight Changing the value of Patient Weight on the Select Patient menu will
change the TV and Rate settings to values that are suggested
starting points for the weight entered.
Calculations for TV and Rate values when patient weight is entered.

Respiratory g = weight in grams
Rate RR = Respiratory Rate
If g is less than or equal to 5,000, then RR = 30.

If g is between 5,000 and 10,000, then RR = 30 - (10 x [{g - 5,000}/5,000]).
If g is between 10,000 and 30, 000, then RR = 20 - (10 x [{g - 10,000}/20,000]).
If g is greater than 30,000, then RR = 10.
Tidal Volume kg = weight in kilograms (If kg is greater than 100, then kg = 100.)
RR = Respiratory Rate
dead space (ds) = kg/0.45
If kg is less than or equal to 45, then TV= ds + (ds x [1.35 + {100- ds} x 0.0135]/0.05/
RR).
If kg is between 45 and 100 or equal to 100, then TV = ds + (ds x [1.35/0.05/RR]).
M1205553 4-3
Patient ID Use the Patient ID menu item to enter an alphanumeric Patient ID

code up to 10 characters.
WARNING To protect patient privacy, do not use the patient’s name as the
patient ID. Consider institution privacy policies when entering
patient’s ID.
1. Select the desired characters and push the ComWheel to
confirm.
2. If less than 10 characters are entered, select SAVE and push the
ComWheel to confirm the patient ID entered.
• It is necessary to select SAVE if the CLR or DEL menu items
were used while entering Patient ID.
• If ten characters are entered, the system automatically saves
and returns the highlight to Patient ID.
Note Patient ID is removed 24 hours after a system power down.
To remove Patient ID, select Patient Setup - Checkout - Delete
Trends.
4-4 M1205553
4 Operation
Pre-use checkout
The ventilator is equipped with an automated checkout. Complete the
checkout before using the ventilator on a new patient. The ventilator
should be fully cleaned and prepared for a patient prior to performing
the checkout.
Checkout includes the following checks:
• Paw Transducer Check
• Barometric Pressure Check
• Relief Valve Check
• Exhalation Valve Check
• Expiratory Flow Sensor Check
• Air Flow Sensor Check
• O2 Flow Sensor Check
• O2 Concentration Sensor Check
• Resistance Check
• Circuit Leak, Compliance, and Resistance
M1205553 4-5
WARNING To help ensure the proper function of the system, it is

highly recommended to complete the pre-use Checkout
between patients.
w Breathing circuits and breathing circuit components are

available in many different configurations from multiple
suppliers. Attributes of the breathing circuits such as
materials, tube length, tube diameter, and configuration of
components within the breathing circuit, may result in
hazards to the patient from increased leakage, added
resistance, or changed circuit compliance. It is
recommended that a Checkout be conducted prior to use
with each patient.
w Failure to complete Checkout may result in inaccurate

delivery and monitoring. Checkout should be completed
with the breathing circuit that will be used during
ventilation.
w If a Checkout is not completed, the system uses the

compliance and resistance data from the last completed
system test for all internal compensations. If the current
breathing circuit differs significantly from the previous
circuit, differences in ventilation parameters due to
changes in the compensation process are possible. This
may result in risk to the patient.
w Changing patient breathing circuits to a different

compressible volume after the checkout will affect the
volume delivery and exhaled volume measurements.
w The patient must NOT be connected to the ventilator

when completing the Checkout.
4-6 M1205553
4 Operation
Checkout procedure When in Standby, the Patient Setup menu will be displayed on the
normal screen.
To begin the Checkout procedure:
1. Select Checkout.
2. Attach the breathing circuit that will be used for ventilating the
current patient.
3. Occlude the patient wye using the occlusion port.
INSP EXP
4. Select Start Check.

• The results appear next to each check as they are
completed.
• During the checkout process, the Resistance Check menu
appears on the display and a tone sounds.
— Remove the occlusion from the patient wye. The system
will detect the occlusion removal and automatically
continue the checkout.
• When the entire checkout is finished ‘Checkout complete’ will
appear and the highlight will move to Delete Trends.
5. Select Yes to erase trends or No to retain the saved trends.
6. If one or more checks failed, select Check Help for
troubleshooting tips.
• Perform Super User calibrations if Check Help is not
successful. See “Installation Mode” in Section 10.
7. If all tests passed, select Patient Setup.
Note The circuit leak is measured at 25 cmH2O. The resistance that is
displayed is only from the inspiratory side.
If the circuit leak is greater than 0.5 l/min or Resistance or
Compliance cannot be calculated, the Circuit Check will fail.
Important If the circuit leak is greater than 0.5 l/min or if the exhalation flow
sensor is changed after Checkout, the expiratory tidal volume
measurement may have decreased accuracy.
Important If the Relief valve failure alarm activates after system check then
system will not ventilate.
M1205553 4-7
Testing alarms The alarms may be tested after the Checkout has been completed.
Connect a patient circuit and a test lung to the ventilator to complete
tests.
Before completing any of the tests:
1. Select Standby - Standby.
2. When testing is complete, remove test lung, then select
Standby - Start Ventilation.
Note Resolved alarms appear as white text on a black background and will
remain on the screen until Silence Alarms is pushed.
Setting up for test 1. Select Vent Setup - VCV - Confirm.

2. Start ventilation by selecting Standby - Start Ventilation.
3. Ensure that no alarms are present. If necessary, modify current
alarm limits.
Pmax alarm test 1. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV - Confirm.
2. Change Pmax to violate the alarm condition.
3. Use the following indicators to verify that the alarm is working
correctly:
• The next complete breath does not rise more than 2 cmH2O
above Pmax.
• The ‘Ppeak high’ alarm appears and sounds.
• The Ppeak measurement appears in a flashing red box.
• The red LED flashes.
4. Increase Pmax to remove alarm condition.
• The Ppeak alarm message changes to white text on a black
background indicating that the alarm has been resolved.
• The alarm tone no longer sounds and the LED turns solid red
until Silence Alarms is pushed to clear the alarm.
5. Change Plimit to below Ppeak.
6. Verify the following:
• Breaths are limited at Plimit.
• The ‘Plimit reached’ alarm appears and sounds.
7. Change Plimit to above Ppeak to remove alarm condition.
Important Make sure the alarm limits are set to the desired values before using
the ventilator on a patient.
4-8 M1205553
4 Operation
Minute volume alarms 1. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV - Confirm.
test 2. Select Alarms Setup - Adjust Limits.
3. Change MVexp lower limit to violate the alarm condition and keep
the menu open.
correctly:
• The ‘MVexp low’ alarm appears and sounds.
• The MVexp measurement appears in a flashing red box.
5. Change the MVexp lower limit to remove alarm condition.
• The ‘MVexp low’ alarm message changes to white text on a
black background indicating that the alarm has been
resolved.
Apnea alarm test 1. Select System Setup - Patient Setup - Vent Preferences -
Assist Control - Off and confirm.
2. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV. Change
Rate to 3 and confirm.
Note Breath timing settings (I:E, Tinsp, TV, Flow) may need to be adjusted
to set the Rate to 3.
3. Select Alarms Setup and set Apnea time to 10 seconds.
4. If not already ventilating, select System Setup - Patient Setup
- Start Ventilation.
correctly:
• The ‘Apnea’ alarm appears and sounds.
• The Respiratory Rate measurement displays ‘APN’ in a
flashing red box.
• ‘Apnea’ is displayed in red text in the Paw waveform.
Note The Apnea alarm may be cleared at the start of the following breath.
6. Select Alarms Setup and set Apnea time to the maximum
setting.
• Verify the ‘Apnea’ alarm message changes to white text on a
resolved.
M1205553 4-9
Low O2 alarm test 1. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV - Confirm.
2. Using the quick key, change FiO2 to 50%.
3. Select Alarms Setup - Adjust Limits.
4. Change the FiO2 upper alarm limit to 70% and the FiO2 lower
alarm limit to 60% and keep the menu open.
correctly:
• The ‘FiO2 low’ alarm appears and sounds.
• The FiO2 measurement appears in a flashing red box.
6. Change the FiO2 upper and lower alarm limits to 56% and 44%.
• Verify the ‘FiO2 low’ alarm message changes to white text on
a black background indicating that the alarm has been
resolved.
Sustained airway 1. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV.
pressure (Paw) test • Set Bias Flow to 10 l/min and confirm settings.
2. Select Alarms Setup - Adjust Limits and set Pmax to the
maximum setting.
4. Occlude the exhalation flow sensor.
Note If Pmax is reached, the 'Ppeak high' or 'Relief valve opened' alarms
may occur. Repeat test with higher Pmax or lower occlusion
pressure.
correctly:
• The ‘Sustained Paw’ alarm appears and sounds.
6. Remove the occlusion from the exhalation flow sensor.
• Verify the ‘Sustained Paw’ alarm message changes to white
text on a black background indicating that the alarm has been
resolved.
4-10 M1205553
4 Operation
Breathing circuit leak 1. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV - Confirm.
test The default settings may be used for this testing.
2. Select Alarms Setup and set Leak Limit to 10%.
3. Set PEEP to Off.
4. Create a small leak by partially disconnecting the expiratory limb
hose from the ventilator.
Note Fully disconnecting the hose may create the ‘Patient Disconnect’
alarm.
correctly:
• The ‘Circuit Leak?’ alarm appears and sounds.
6. Reconnect the expiratory limb hose to the ventilator.
7. Select Alarms Setup and set Leak Limit to 50%.
• Verify the ‘Circuit Leak?’ alarm message changes to white
text on a black background indicating that the alarm has been
resolved.
8. The alarm tone no longer sounds and the LED turns solid red
Patient disconnect test 1. If not already in PCV mode, select Vent Setup - PCV - Confirm.
2. Set PEEP to 5 cmH2O.
4. Disconnect the Inspiratory limb hose from the ventilator.
correctly:
• The ‘Patient disconnected’ alarm appears and sounds.
6. Reconnect the Inspiratory limb hose to the ventilator.
• Verify the ‘Patient disconnected’ alarm message changes to
white text on a black background indicating that the alarm
has been resolved.
7. The alarm tone no longer sounds and the LED turns solid red
Power failure alarm test 1. With the System switch set to On, unplug the power cord.
2. Verify the 'On battery' alarm appears and sounds.
Note If the batteries are not fully charged, the 'System shutdown in
< X min' alarm may appear and sound instead.
3. Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet.
4. Verify that the alarm clears.
M1205553 4-11
Vent Setup
Ventilator setup selections are made in the Vent Setup menu. The
Vent Setup menu can be accessed through the Vent Setup key or
through the Patient Setup menu.
Ventilation mode Modes may be changed in Standby or while the ventilator is

operating.
To change modes:
1. Select Vent Setup.
2. Select desired mode.
• The arrow identifies the current mode.
3. Select Confirm.
Ventilation soft limit When adjusting ventilation settings, visual indicators (or soft limits)
indicators show the parameters are approaching their setting limits.
Quick key and menu item boxes will show in yellow or red as a
warning of high values when ventilation settings are selected. The
user will be allowed to set the limit. It is only a visual cue that the
parameter is approaching the setting limit. The parameters with soft
limits are Pmax, PEEP, Pinsp, Psupp, Tinsp, RR, I:E, Thigh, Tlow,
Phigh, Plow.
Ventilation settings All settings should be set prior to connecting a patient to the
ventilator.
To change the settings for the current mode:
1. Select Vent Setup.
2. Select Adjust Settings.
3. Scroll to the desired setting.
4. Select setting, change the value, and push the ComWheel to
confirm the setting.
5. Select Exit when complete.
See “Settings definitions” in Section 1 and “Specifications” in Section
11 for more detailed information.
4-12 M1205553
4 Operation
Ventilation Ventilation preferences are set through the Vent Preferences menu.
preferences To adjust the ventilation preferences during ventilation:
2. Select Patient Setup.
3. Select Vent Preferences.
Selecting a Backup Ventilation modes to which backup ventilation apply are established
mode by facility defaults. See “Installation Mode,” Section 10.
WARNING Ensure that all users at the facility have been trained and
notified of the facility default settings relating to Backup
mode.
Backup ventilation will be initiated if the Apnea alarm is triggered or if
the patient’s minute ventilation decreases to below 50% of the set low
MVexp alarm. Backup settings may be changed for each patient.
To select a Backup Mode:
1. Select Vent Setup - Backup Mode or select Vent Preferences
- Backup Mode.
• See “Modes with Backup” menu in Section 10.
2. Select the ventilation mode to be used if the system goes into
backup ventilation.
3. Use the ComWheel to navigate through the adjustment window
and to change a value. Grayed-out values are carried over from
the current ventilation mode.
4. Push the ComWheel to confirm the setting.
Note Backup mode can be set to any mode except CPAP/PSV.
Changing Backup mode To adjust the settings of a selected Backup mode:

settings 1. Select Vent Setup - Backup Mode or select Vent Preferences
- Backup Mode.
4. Select setting, change the value, and push the ComWheel to
M1205553 4-13
Airway Resistance Airway Resistance Compensation (ARC) adjusts the target delivery
Compensation (ARC) pressure to compensate for the resistance caused by the
endotracheal tube or tracheostomy tube used. The compensation is
applied to the inspiratory phase of all pressure-controlled, CPAP, and
pressure-supported breaths.
To set airway resistance compensation:
1. Select Vent Preferences - ARC.
2. Select desired settings.
• Type and size of tube.
• Compensation. The compensation setting determines for
what percentage of the total tube resistance is compensated.
3. Select Previous Menu.
Note ARC settings of 75% and higher may result in brief minor overshoots
of target lung pressure depending on patient conditions, including low
airway resistance and low lung compliance. Ensure proper Pmax
setting when using ARC. ARC control is limited to Pmax - 5 cmH2O.
Assist control Assist control is available in VCV, PCV, and PCV-VG modes.
To Activate assist control through the Vent Preferences menu:
• Set to On to deliver a controlled breath during the expiratory
phase when a patient trigger is detected.
• Set to Off to support spontaneous patient breathing at the PEEP
pressure level during the expiratory phase.
When Assist Control is set Off, the ventilator will allow spontaneous
inspirations from the PEEP level to be completed, and delay the
delivery of the next controlled breath in order to minimize breath
stacking. Under certain conditions such as high spontaneous
breathing rates or high leakage, the delivered rate of controlled
breaths may fall below the set rate. To ensure that the rate of delivery
of controlled breaths meets or exceeds the set rate, Assist Control
should be set On.
4-14 M1205553
4 Operation
Leak compensation Leak compensation automatically adjusts ventilation delivery and

monitoring for breathing circuit and patient airway leaks to maintain
desired tidal volume delivery in the presence of leaks. Activate leak
compensation through the Vent Preferences menu.
The system calculates the instantaneous leak rate by using the leak
volume over the previous 30 seconds and the instantaneous and
mean airway pressures:
• Vleak = Leak volume from previous 30 seconds
• Leak rate = Vleak x (instantaneous Paw / mean Paw from the
previous 30 seconds)
• Leak compensated patient flow = measured Flow - Leak rate
Leak compensation provides the following benefits to the clinician
when leaks are present:
• Leak compensated volume delivery: The vent engine’s delivered
tidal volume is compensated upwards to ensure the patient
receives the set tidal volume. Leak compensated volume delivery
is available in VCV, PCV-VG, SIMV-VC, and SIMV-PCVG,
BiLevel-VG, and VG-PS if installed.
• Leak compensated waveforms and measured values: Adjusts the
flow and volume waveforms and measured values for the effects
of leaks in the breathing circuit (when the internal ventilator
sensors are in use) and patient airway. The Leak Compensated
Patient Flow is used for the flow and volume waveform displays,
and measured values (TVinsp, TVexp, MVinsp, MVexp). Leak
compensated waveforms and measured values are only
displayed when their Data Source is “Vent”.
• Measured value Leak %: Indicates the amount of leak from the
previous breath and is calculated as: Leak % = (actual TVinsp -
actual TVexp)* 100 / (actual TVinsp). Leak % is displayed
whenever Vent is selected as the data source.
Example:
Given the following settings and measured values and assuming
there are no water vapor and temperature effects:
• TV = 300 ml
• RR = 10
• I:E = 1:2
• measured leak volume during previous inspiratory phase = 55 ml
• measured leak volume during previous expiratory phase = 25 ml
During the next breath, the vent engine delivers 355 ml during
inspiration. The patient will receive 300 ml. The expiratory flow sensor
will measure 275 ml. Measured TVinsp and TVexp will report 300 ml.
Assuming this same breath profile repeats itself, MVinsp and MVexp
will report 3.0 l/min. The Leak % will report (355-275) / 355 => 23%.
M1205553 4-15
This example demonstrates a leak compensated volume delivery of

55/300 => 18%. The system limits volume control leak compensation
to 25% of set tidal volume for adult patients and 100% or 100 ml,
whichever is less for pediatric and neonatal patients.
Note Leak rate is based on the average leak from the previous breath, it
may take up to 30 seconds for the system to fully respond to changes
in patient leak rates.
Note While the ‘Circuit leak?’ alarm is active, leak compensated volume
delivery will not exceed the compensation level that existed at the
time the alarm became active.
Trigger compensation Trigger compensation adjusts the flow trigger for leaks in the
breathing circuit and patient airway, reducing the need to manually
adjust the Trigger setting to prevent autotriggering. Trigger
compensation is available in all modes and may be activated through
the Vent Preferences menu.
• Vleak = Leak volume from previous 30 seconds

• Leak rate = Vleak x (instantaneous Paw / mean Paw from the
previous 30 seconds)
• Flow to the patient = measured Flow - Leak rate
• When the flow to the patient exceeds the set Trigger, a breath will
be delivered.
• Trigger and End Flow are compensated for leaks when trigger
compensation is On.
TV based on The flow and volume values are adjusted based on the condition that
is selected for TV Based on in the Vent Preferences menu.
• Use ambient temperature pressure dry (ATPD) when a humidifier
is not added to the patient circuit.
• Use body temperature pressure saturated (BTPS) when an active
humidifier is added to the inspiratory limb of the circuit.
Example: If BTPS is selected and the tidal volume is set for 300 ml,
the ventilator will deliver 266 ml (assuming ambient 20°C and 745
mmHg.) The humidifier will warm the tidal volume delivered and add
water vapor. This results in a delivery of 300 ml to the patient
because the temperature and humidity affects the flow and volume
delivered.
4-16 M1205553
4 Operation
Alarms setup Alarm limits, alarm volume, and other alarm settings are adjusted in
the Alarms Setup menu. Alarm history is also accessed through this
menu. Selecting Default Limits loads the default settings as set by the
Super User or the factory defaults if no Super User settings have
been entered.
Setting alarm limits These alarm limits can be changed:

• Low and High Ppeak
• Low and High MVexp
• Low and High TVexp
• Low and High RR
• Low and High EtCO2
• Low and High EtO2
• Low and High FiO2
• Low and High PEEPe
• High PEEPi
• High Paux
To set alarm limits:

1. Push Alarms Setup.
2. Select Adjust Limits.
3. Scroll to the desired alarm.
4. Select alarm limit and change value.
Note The low Ppeak alarm limit is not active for pressure-supported
breaths in CPAP/PSV mode.
Leak limit The Leak Limit setting determines what size leak is allowed before a
leak alarm condition is activated. The setting is a percentage of the
total volume delivered to the patient and may be set to Off.
To set leak limit:
2. Select Leak Limit and change the value.
Apnea time The Apnea Time setting determines how much time is allowed
between patient breaths before the Apnea alarm is activated.
To set apnea time:
2. Select Apnea Time and change the value.
M1205553 4-17
Alarm volume The volume at which alarms are annunciated may be selected as a
value from 1 (low) to 5 (high).
To set alarm volume:
2. Select Alarm Volume and change the value.
High alert audio If a high priority alarm has not been resolved the alarm volume can be
set to elevate to a higher volume after a specific amount of time. The
High Alert Audio can be set to be activated between 0 and 30
seconds of an alarm activating and may also be turned Off.
To set high alert audio:
2. Select High Alert Audio and change the value.
Alarm history The most recent 200 medium and high-priority alarms activated since
the last power cycle are displayed with the date and time in the Alarm
History menu.
To access alarm history:
2. Select Alarm History to scroll and view recent alarms.
FiO2 alarm limits The Low and High FiO2 alarm limits are based on current settings.
The FiO2 alarm limits are set by default to ±6 from the current FiO2
setting. The differential alarm limits may be changed manually. If an
alarm limit is changed, the ventilator will maintain the difference
between the alarm limit setting and the FiO2 setting, even if the FiO2
setting is changed.
For example, if the current setting for FiO2 is 65%, the default of the
High FiO2 alarm limit would be 71%, a difference of 6%. A change to
the FiO2 setting to 75% will result in the alarm limit being raised to
81%, maintaining the 6% difference. If the alarm limit is manually
changed to 85%, creating a 10% difference from the setting,
subsequent FiO2 setting changes will maintain the new 10% alarm
limit difference.
Note The High FiO2 alarm is disabled when set FiO2 = 100%.
4-18 M1205553
4 Operation
Selecting a data Several monitoring parameters may be obtained from either the
source ventilator or the airway module. These include Ppeak, Pmean,
PEEPe, Pplat, TVinsp, TVexp, RR, MVexp, MVinsp, Compl, and
Raw. Information that is retrieved from the airway module is identified
with the module data indicator. See “Airway modules” Section 5 for
more information.
To select a data source:
2. Select Parameters Setup - Data Source.
3. Select Vent or Mod as the primary source for information.
• If Vent is selected, the internal sensors of the ventilator will
be the first source for information.
• If Mod is selected, the airway module will be the first source
for information. If information is not available through the
airway module, information will come from the internal
ventilator sensors.
Note If Mod is selected and the airway module is warming up, information
from the Vent will be used until the airway module information is
available. Warm up can take up to 2 minutes.
Note The internal sensors of the ventilator are used as the data source to
determine Spontaneous measured values.
M1205553 4-19
Starting ventilation
WARNING Do not use antistatic or electrically conductive breathing

tubes or masks.
w The ventilator shall not be covered in such a way that fans

and exhaust ports are compromised or positioned in such
a way that the operation or performance is adversely
affected.
w Ensure that an alternate means of ventilation is available

any time the ventilator is in use.
To start ventilation:
1. Push Standby.
2. Select Start Ventilation.
3. Connect the circuit to the patient.
4-20 M1205553
4 Operation
Entering Standby
Monitoring and ventilation will cease when the ventilator is placed into
Standby. Follow the method for “Starting ventilation” to exit Standby.
WARNING The patient will not be ventilated when in Standby.

To enter Standby:
1. Disconnect the patient from the circuit.
2. Push Standby.
3. Select Standby.
Turning the system The system may only be turned off when in Standby. Follow the
off procedure for “Entering Standby,” and turn the system switch off.
Monitoring
The ventilator with an airway module installed may be used as a CO2,
O2, and metabolic monitoring device. Ventilation will cease when the
ventilator is placed into Monitoring Only.
WARNING The patient will not be ventilated when in Monitoring Only.

To enter Monitoring Only:
1. Push Standby.
2. Select Monitoring Only.
M1205553 4-21
Park Circuit Use this function to allow the patient circuit to be occluded without the
ventilator alarming while in standby. This function allows the patient
circuit to be hygienically protected while waiting to connect the
patient. Removing the circuit occlusion will clear the Park Circuit
status.
The message “Circuit Parked” appears on the screen while in this
mode.
WARNING The patient will not be ventilated while the circuit is

parked.
To Park the Circuit:
1. Push Standby.
2. Select Standby.
3. Occlude the patient circuit using the occlusion port shown below.
4. Select Park Circuit
INSP EXP
4-22 M1205553
4 Operation
Changing settings while ventilating
Ventilation settings Method 1:

1. Push a quick key.
2. Change the value.
3. Confirm the setting.
Method 2:
1. Push Vent Setup.
4. Select setting, change the value and push the ComWheel to
Ventilation To access ventilation preferences:

preferences 1. Push System Setup.
2. Select Patient Setup - Vent Preferences.
3. Adjust the desired selections and push the ComWheel to confirm
the setting.
4. Push Normal Screen.
Alarm limits To set alarm limits:

2. Select Adjust Limits.
3. Scroll to the desired alarm.
4. Select setting, change the value and push the ComWheel to
Auto Limits Selecting Auto Limits will change the following alarm limit settings
based on current measured values. Alarm limits that are set to Off will
not change if Auto Limits is selected.
• Low and High MVexp
• Low and High TVexp
• Low and High RR
• Low and High EtCO2
• Low and High PEEPe
M1205553 4-23
This table explains how the auto limits are calculated from the
measured values.
Alarm Setting Upper Limit Lower Limit

MVexp (2.5)(current MVexp) (0.5)(current MVexp)
TVexp (2.5)(current TVexp) (0.5)(current TVexp)
RR current RR + 30 current RR - 2
EtCO2 (% or kPa) current EtCO2 + 1 current EtCO2 - 1
EtCO2 (mmHg only) current EtCO2 + 6 current EtCO2 - 6
PEEPe (cmH2O, current PEEPe + 5 current PEEPe - 5
mbar)
PEEPe (kPa) current PEEPe + 0.5 current PEEPe - 0.5
Default limits Selecting Default Limits will change the alarm limits to the facility
default settings if the default limits do not conflict with the current
ventilation settings.
Using snapshots
Taking a snapshot Use the Take Snapshot feature to capture the waveform clips, active
alarms, measured parameters, and ventilator settings that are
currently on the display. The ten most recent shapshots are stored in
memory. When an eleventh snapshot is saved, the oldest snapshot is
deleted. A message in the general message field indicates the
snapshot recorded. Three pages of information are recorded for each
snapshot.
Push Take Snapshot to record a snapshot.
Viewing a snapshot To view a snapshot:

1. Push Trends.
2. Select Snapshot.
3. The most recent snapshot will show in the right side menu.
• Select Next Page to scroll through the three pages of
snapshot information.
• Continue to scroll to the next page to view additional
snapshots that have been saved to the memory.
• Select Cursor to view the waveform values stored in
memory.
4-24 M1205553
4 Operation
Viewing trends
The views for patient trends are graphical, snapshot, measured, and
settings. The settings view will show SBT in the mode column when
the Spontaneous Breathing Trial (SBT) is active, S-PCVG when
SIMV-PCVG is active, and BiLev-VG when Bilevel-VG is active.
Trend information will automatically be saved every minute for the
most recent 12 hours of data, every 5 minutes for data from 12 to 48
hours, and every 30 minutes for data from 48 hours to 14 days.
Trend information can be deleted in the Checkout menu or will be
deleted if the system is powered down and has not been powered on
for 24 hours.
To view Trends:
1. Push Trends.
2. Select the desired view.
• The arrow identifies the current trend view.
3. Select Cursor to scroll through the current trend view.
4. Push the ComWheel to return the highlight to Cursor.
5. Select Next Page to view additional parameters or snapshots.
Trends split screen Trends are also available as a split screen view. Split screen trends
will show a small graphic trend of the measured parameters for 120
minutes of data.
Displayed waveform Trend displayed

Paw Ppeak, Pplat
Flow MVexp, Rate
Volume Spont MV, Spont RR
Paux Paux peak
CO2 EtCO2
O2 EtO2, FiO2
Viewing waveforms Waveforms will be displayed in the set waveform color. When a
patient triggers a breath, the inspiratory phase of the pressure and
flow waveforms will be displayed in red.
AB.98.225
Waveforms can be displayed using two speeds: Fast and Slow.

To change the sweep speed, select: System Setup - Screen Setup
- Sweep Speed.
M1205553 4-25
Viewing spirometry Loops

There are three types of spirometry loops:
• Pressure-Volume (P-V)
• Flow-Volume (F-V)
• Pressure-Flow (P-F)
Spirometry loops may be viewed through a menu or as a split screen.
The loop type displayed may be selected in the Spirometry or
Spirometry Setup menu.
AB.98.039
1. Volume axis
2. Pressure axis
3. Real time loop
4. Reference loop (appears on display in white)
Figure 4-1 • Example of a P-V loop
Sensor type Sensor Type refers to the style of airway adapter used with the airway
module. If spirometry data is to be obtained from the airway module,
ensure the Sensor Type matches the airway adapter used. If an
airway module is not installed, Sensor Type will not be selectable.
If the Sensor Type is not set correctly the information displayed may
not be accurate.
To select the sensor type:
1. Push Spirometry.
2. Select Spiro Setup- Sensor Type.
3. Select Adult or Pedi depending on the sensor used.
• Adult refers to the D-lite sensor.
• Pedi refers to the Pedi-lite sensor.
4-26 M1205553
4 Operation
Spirometry menu Loops may be saved, viewed, and erased in the Spirometry menu.
• Push Spirometry.
• To view a specific loop type; select Loop Type and the
desired view.
• To store a loop to memory; select Save Loop.
• To view a saved loop; select Reference Loop and the time at
which the loop was saved.
• To erase a saved loop; select Erase Loop and the time at
which the loop was saved.
Using the cursor The cursor is an easy way to quickly read the volume and pressure of
the spirometry loop.
AB.98.140
2
1. Cursor
2. Pressure point of intersection
3. Volume points of intersection
Figure 4-2 • Cursor view
1. In the Spirometry menu, select Cursor.

2. Turn the ComWheel to move the cursor across the graph.
• The volume points of intersection show in top to bottom order
at the left of the graph.
• The pressure point of intersection shows below the graph.
3. Push the ComWheel to remove the cursor from the graph.
M1205553 4-27
Spirometry split Spirometry loops may be viewed alongside the waveforms on the
screen normal screen.
To set up the split screen:
1. Push Spirometry.
2. Select Spiro Setup.
3. Select Split Screen - Spiro.
Lower spiro split Measured values or an additional spirometry loop may be viewed on
screen the lower portion of the split screen. Spiro must be selected as the
Split Screen to set Lower Spiro Split Screen.
To set up the lower spiro split screen:
1. Push Spirometry.
2. Select Spiro Setup.
3. Select Split Screen - Spiro.
4. Select Lower Spiro Split Screen.
5. Select Digits, P-V, F-V, or P-F.
4-28 M1205553
4 Operation
Performing Vent Calculations

Vent calculations is used to automate calculations for patient lab data
and may only be used for Adult and Pediatric patients.
To calculate patient values:
1. Select Trends Setup - Vent Calculations.
• The Lab Values menu displays.
2. Select Enter Values.
3. Select Sample Time and enter the correct time the patient
sample was collected.
4. Enter the desired patient lab data values and push the
ComWheel to confirm lab values.
5. Select Calculate.
• Vent calculations automatically display in the Ventilation
Calculations menu.
To view completed lab data calculations:

1. Select History.
• The Vent Calcs History menu displays showing the sample
dates and times the calculations were made.
2. Select Next Page to view additional history pages or Previous
Page.
• When a vent calculation is entered and the Vent Calcs
History contains the maximum number of entries (45), the
oldest vent calculation is deleted.
Vent Calcs Lab Values

Enter Values Sample Time
History Hb g/l, g/dl, mmol/l
Next Page SaO2 %
Previous Page SvO2 %
Previous Menu PaO2 kPa, mmHg
PvO2 kPa, mmHg
PaCO2 kPa, mmHg
Calculate
Parameter Calculation
PAO2 FiO2/100 *(ATMP-47) - PaCO2 *(FiO2/100+(1-FIO2/100)/ RQ)
AaDO2 PAO2 - PaO2
Pa/FiO2 PaO2/FiO2 *100
PaO2/PAO2 PaO2/PAO2 *100
CO VO2/(CaO2 - CvO2)
Vd/Vt (PaCO2 - ExpCO2 Wet)/(PaCO2 - FiCO2 Wet) *100
Vd (Vd/Vt /100) * TVexp
VA (VCO2/1000)/(PaCO2/ATMP - 47) * 1.212
M1205553 4-29
Performing procedures
Increase O2 Increased oxygen may be delivered for two minutes. A general

message appears with the time remaining. If delivery is not manually
stopped it will automatically end after two minutes.
1. Push ↑ O2.
• The O2 countdown time is displayed in the general message
field.
2. The O2 concentration can be adjusted to a level less than 100%
by turning the ComWheel and confirming the setting.
3. Push ↑ O2 to resume the previous setting for O2 before the two
minutes has elapsed.
Nebulizer The system operates with the Aeroneb Pro and Aeroneb Solo
Nebulizer Systems by Aerogen. See “Setup and Connections” in
Section 3 for assembly information.
CAUTION Do not insert an airway module into the module bay until
at least one minute after a nebulizer procedure.
Aerosolized medication may damage the D-fend or
interfere with the airway module measurements.
Note The addition of nebulizer flow will not be reflected on the FiO2
reading.
Note Gas sampling and monitoring is suspended while the nebulizer is in
use.
Nebulization can be set for a specific delivery time or for the volume
of medication delivery. The nebulizer will begin and continue for the
length of time or volume selected. A general message appears with
the amount of nebulization time remaining.
Note If the nebulizer is dry, it may start and stop intermittently for up to the
first minute of operation. To prevent this, turn the nebulizer off when
the medication has been completely dispensed.
Follow these steps to deliver nebulized medications to the
patient:
1. Push Nebulizer.
2. Select Volume or Time and change to the desired value.
3. To deliver multiple nebulizer cycles, set the number of Cycles
and the Pause Time between cycles.
4. Select Start.
5. To end before selected time, select Nebulizer - Stop.
4-30 M1205553
4 Operation
Pneumatic nebulizer The Engström system can compensate for additional flow introduced
by a pneumatic nebulizer into the patient circuit.
Note The addition of nebulizer flow will not be reflected on the FiO2
reading.
WARNING Use of an external pneumatic nebulizer may significantly

modify the mixture of gas that is delivered to the patient.
w When the Pneumatic Nebulizer Flow Compensation is

On, volume monitoring and delivery accuracy is
decreased.
w Use of an external pneumatic nebulizer may significantly

modify the volume of gas that is delivered to the patient if
external flow is introduced and Pneumatic Nebulizer Flow
Compensation is not used.
w Leaks and flow sensor alarms may not be identified by the

ventilator when Pneumatic Nebulizer Flow Compensation
is On.
To set the ventilator for pneumatic nebulizer use:
1. Push Nebulizer.
2. Select Pneumatic Nebulizer.
3. Select Flow and adjust the flow value to match the amount of
flow that will be introduced into the circuit, then push the
ComWheel to confirm the setting.
4. Select Flow Compensation - On.
5. Introduce the pneumatic nebulizer into the patient circuit.
• For best results, introduce the pneumatic nebulizer into the
patient circuit within approximately 15 seconds of selecting
Flow Compensation On.
To end pneumatic nebulizer use:

1. Push Nebulizer.
2. Select Pneumatic Nebulizer.
3. Turn pneumatic nebulizer flow source off.
4. Select Flow Compensation - Off.
5. Press Previous Menu or Normal Screen to exit.
M1205553 4-31
Manual Breath An additional breath may be delivered to the patient by selecting

Procedures - Manual Breath. The system requires a 0.25 second
pause between delivery of manual breaths. This breath will be based
on the settings for the current mode. Manual Breath is not available in
CPAP/PSV mode.
Suction When the Suction procedure is activated the system delivers 100%
O2 in Adult and Pediatric patients or a user-set increase over current
setting for Neonatal patients for 2 minutes, or until the patient is
disconnected. The system then goes into Standby for 2 minutes or
until the patient is reconnected. Next, the system resumes ventilating
at the current settings delivering the increased O2 value for 2
minutes.
Note If the patient is not disconnected during the first increased O2 phase,
the suction procedure will cancel.
Note The suction procedure is not meant for in-line suction because it
requires that the patient be disconnected in order for the procedure to
move to the next phase.
To begin Suction procedure:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Suction.
3. The system will deliver increased O2 for 2 minutes or until the
patient is disconnected.
4. Disconnect the patient. Suction the patient.
• A medium priority alarm will sound once with no message.
• The system will enter Standby mode for 2 minutes or until the
patient is reconnected.
5. Reconnect the patient to resume ventilation. The system will
deliver increased O2 for 2 minutes.
Note To stop an active suction procedure during increased O2 delivery,
push Procedures and select Suction or push ↑ O2.
CAUTION To detect a patient disconnect during the Suction

procedure, PEEP and Plow will be increased to a
minimum value of 1.5 cmH2O, if the current set value is 1
or less.
4-32 M1205553
4 Operation
P 0.1 This procedure reflects neuromuscular activation of the patient during

spontaneous breathing. P 0.1 measures the airway occlusion
pressure 0.1 second after beginning an inspiratory effort against an
occluded airway.
The result will appear in the Lung Mechanics menu along with a time
stamp. It will remain here until the procedure is selected again, or
until the ventilator is put into Standby.
To obtain a P 0.1 measurement:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Lung Mechanics - P 0.1.
Note To stop an active P 0.1 procedure, push the ComWheel.
Negative Inspiratory The Negative Inspiratory Force procedure is used to measure a

Force (NIF) patient’s most negative airway pressure (as measured by the
expiratory pressure sensor) during the set NIF time.
At the beginning of the NIF procedure, the patient is instructed to fully
exhale. The clinician selects NIF in the Lung Mechanics menu. The
system waits to detect a breath trigger to begin the procedure. When
the NIF procedure is complete, the most negative airway pressure is
then recorded. The system displays the NIF and P 0.1 measurements
with time stamps in the Lung Mechanics window.
If NIF is more negative than -(20 cmH2O + PEEP) the ventilator will
display “< -(20 + PEEP)”.
WARNING Patient is not ventilated during a NIF procedure.

To begin NIF procedure:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Lung Mechanics - NIF Time.
• Use the ComWheel to select a NIF time up to 30 seconds.
3. Select NIF.
Note To stop an active NIF procedure before the set NIF time period, push
the ComWheel.
M1205553 4-33
Vital Capacity (VC) The Vital Capacity procedure is used to measure a patient’s (TVexp)
expired Tidal Volume.
During a VC procedure, Pinsp and Psupp (PSV) are automatically set
to zero. When the VC procedure is complete Pinsp, or Phigh and
Psupp (PSV) automatically return to the previous setting.
When VC is activated, the clinician instructs the patient to fully inhale
and exhale over a 30 second time period or until the clinician ends the
procedure by pushing the ComWheel. The system measures and
displays the TVinsp and TVexp for each breath in the spirometry
window.
When the Vital Capacity procedure is complete, the system reports
the largest TVexp as the VC measurement in units of mL with a time
stamp in the Lung Mechanics window. This information remains until
the procedure is selected again, or until the ventilator is put into
Standby.
WARNING Patient is not ventilated during a VC procedure.

To begin Vital Capacity measurement:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Lung Mechanics - Vital Capacity.
Note To stop an active Vital Capacity procedure, push the ComWheel.
4-34 M1205553
4 Operation
Intrinsic PEEP The Intrinsic PEEP procedure will stop the flow of gas at the end of
expiration and measure the airway pressure when the lung
equilibrates with the circuit pressure. Intrinsic PEEP is the amount of
pressure remaining above the PEEP value.
The result will appear in the Procedures menu along with a time
stamp. It will remain here until the procedure is selected again, or
until the ventilator is put into Standby.
To obtain an Intrinsic PEEP measurement:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Intrinsic PEEP.
• The system will attempt to measure Intrinsic PEEP at the end
of each controlled breath during a 30 second time period. If
unsuccessful, then the procedure is cancelled.
• Spontaneous breath triggers or activation of other
procedures may cause an unsuccessful measurement.
• The effects of breathing circuit compliance are accounted for
in the Intrinsic PEEP measurement.
Note To stop an active Intrinsic PEEP procedure, push the ComWheel.
PEEPi Volume Selecting Intrinsic PEEP will also calculate the PEEPi Volume. This is
the approximate volume of air trapped in the lungs at the time the
Intrinsic PEEP procedure is activated. PEEPi Volume is calculated
from the current compliance and PEEPi measurement.
If PEEPi Volume cannot be calculated when Intrinsic PEEP is
selected, --- will be displayed.
PEEPi Volume is abbreviated as P Vol in the trend pages.
M1205553 4-35
Inspiratory Hold When Inspiratory Hold is selected, the inspiratory and expiratory
valves close at the end of the next inspiratory phase. The duration of
the inspiratory hold can be selected. This function can be used during
x-ray procedures or to determine plateau pressure and static
compliance calculations. The inspiratory hold cannot be repeated
until the patient triggers a spontaneous breath or the ventilator
delivers a mandatory breath.
To start an Inspiratory Hold:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Inspiratory Hold Time.
• Use the ComWheel to select an inspiratory hold time
between 2 and 15 seconds.
• The total Tinsp + Hold Time is limited to 15 seconds.
3. Select Inspiratory Hold.
Note To stop an active inspiratory hold, push the ComWheel.
Expiratory Hold When Expiratory Hold is selected, the inspiratory and expiratory
valves close at the end of the next expiratory phase. The duration of
the expiratory hold can be selected. This function can provide the
ability to measure the end expiratory lung pressure and may be used
for static compliance measurements. The expiratory hold cannot be
repeated until the patient triggers a spontaneous breath or the
ventilator delivers a mandatory breath.
To start an Expiratory Hold:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Expiratory Hold Time.
• Use the ComWheel to select an expiratory hold time between
2 and 20 seconds.
3. Select Expiratory Hold.
Note To stop an active expiratory hold, push the ComWheel.
4-36 M1205553
4 Operation
Spontaneous This procedure will place the ventilator in CPAP / PSV mode at the
Breathing Trial (SBT) settings defined in the SBT menu. Alarm limits for tidal volume, apnea
time, minute volume, respiratory rate can also be set in this menu.
If the minute volume or respiratory rate alarm limits are exceeded
during the SBT, the trial will immediately end and the ventilator will
return to the previous mode and settings. A window will appear with a
selection to return to the SBT or to continue ventilation with current
settings (previous to SBT).
If the apnea alarm limit is exceeded during the SBT, the trial will
immediately end and the ventilator will return to the previous mode
and settings.
The SBT Split Screen displays the MVexp, RR, and EtCO2 for the
trial. The trial results will remain in the split screen until the next trial is
run.
A general message appears while the SBT is running indicating the
amount of time remaining in the trial.
The trial will automatically end at the time set and the ventilator will
return to the previous mode and settings. An informational alarm will
appear when there are 2 minutes remaining in the SBT.
The Ppeak Low alarm for SBT is not based on the set value in the
Alarms Setup menu. The Ppeak Low alarm will occur if the Pexp or
Pinsp is less than 1 cmH2O for 15 continuous seconds.
Note The Ppeak low setting displayed during SBT is based off of the
PEEP/Ppeak low parameters set in the SBT menu, prior to starting
the SBT procedure. When the SBT procedure is terminated, the
system reverts back to the previous Ppeak low.
Start SBT To start SBT:

1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Spont. Breath. Trial.
3. To change the ventilation settings and alarm limits, select Adjust
Settings.
4. Ensure the time is correct. Time may be set from 2 to 120
minutes.
5. To view a SBT trend, select Split Screen - SBT.
6. Select Start to begin.
Stop an active SBT To stop an active SBT before the time expires:
1. Push Procedures.
2. Select Spont. Breath. Trial.
3. To return to the previous mode and settings, select Stop.
4. To continue with the current CPAP / PSV settings, select Adopt
Settings.
M1205553 4-37
Rapid Shallow The Rapid Shallow Breathing Index (RSBI) is used to assess whether
Breathing Index the patient is ready to begin the weaning process. The RSBI can be
displayed in the Volume measured value field or in the Volume digit
(RSBI) field. RSBI is calculated using spontaneous breath rate/TV (averaged
over 1 minute).
To access RSBI:
2. Select Screen Setup.
3. Set the Wave Field 3 or Digit Field to Vol.
EVair 03 compressor operation

The power switch must be on for the compressor to operate as either
the primary or reserve air supply. The green indicator light should be
lit. See “Setup and Connections” in Section 3 for pre-use instructions.
Primary supply When used as the primary air supply, the pump will run continuously
regardless of the ventilator demand. The pump pressure gauge will
indicate the air pressure supplied to the ventilator, nominally about
500 kPa (80 psi). The pipeline pressure gauge will indicate no
pressure.
Reserve supply When used as a reserve air supply, a pipeline medical air supply
must be connected to the compressor pipeline air inlet. The pump will
not run as long as the pipeline air supply is maintained above a
pressure of approximately 280 kPa (41 psi). If the pipeline air supply
fails or the pressure drops below 250 kPa (36 psi), the compressor
will turn on automatically. Reestablishing the air pipeline supply to a
pressure greater than 280 kPa (41 psi) will switch the compressor
back to standby. This pressure difference will minimize the cycling of
the compressor between on and standby when the air supply
pressure is low and unreliable.
The compressor has a 1.5 liter reservoir at the outlet which can
supply the ventilator with a peak flow of 160 l/min or more for short
durations. The reservoir is common to both the pipeline and the
compressor air supplies.
4-38 M1205553
5 Airway Modules
In this section Compact airway modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Connection to a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Gas exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Patient spirometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Gas calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
M1205553 5-1
Compact airway modules

The optional compact airway modules measure and monitor gases
delivered to the patient and exhaled through the breathing circuit.
The modules consist of nondispersive infrared technology for
measuring CO2 , N2O, and anesthetic agents; paramagnetic
technology for measuring O2; differential pressure techniques for
measuring spirometry inputs from the D-lite sensor; and a D-fend
water separation system.
Several parameters may be measured by either the internal
ventilator sensors or by the airway module. When the module is
selected as the primary source, or the only source for specific
data, the module data indicator will appear in the specific data
area.
Monitoring that is critical to patient safety will come from both the
ventilator and the compact airway module regardless of the data
source selection. In rare circumstances, alarms may be triggered by
the internal sensors even though the values displayed are from the
module sensors. See “Troubleshooting” section for more information.
CAUTION Use only cables and accessories approved by

Datex-Ohmeda. Other cables and accessories may
damage the system or interfere with measurement.
Single-use accessories are not designed to be reused.
This system is compatible with the E series modules E-miniC, E-CO,
E-COV, E-COVX, E-CAiO, E-CAiOV, and E-CAiOVX and the
M series modules M-miniC, M-CO, M-COV, M-COVX, M-CAiO,
M-CAiOV, and M-CAiOVX. (Modules must be software version 3.2
and above. E-miniC and M-miniC modules must be software version
1.0 and above.) Letters in the compact airway modules stand for:
• E = plug-in gas module
• M = plug-in gas module
• C = CO2 (and N2O in compact gas modules)
• O = patient O2
• V = patient spirometry
• X = gas exchange
• A = anesthetic agents
• i = agent identification
Important The ventilator is not intended for use with anesthetic agents. It does
not currently measure or display anesthetic agents.
5-2 M1205553
5 Airway Modules
Engström system software will not allow both the top and bottom
connection ports of the module bay to be used simultaneously.
Models with this restriction will have caps placed over the lower
connection ports on the inside of the module bay. These caps will be
removed by a Datex-Ohmeda authorized service representative when
the software is upgraded to a level that accepts modules in both
sections of the module bay.
Save Print Change

Loop Loop Loop
2
Spirometry
7 3
4
6 Ref.
Gas
5
Gas
Exhaust
AB.98.272
E-COVX
1. D-fend water trap

2. Sampling line connector
3. Water trap latch
4. Reference gas inlet
5. Sample gas outlet
6. Cooling fan
7. Spirometry sensor connectors
Figure 5-1 • Compact airway module
M1205553 5-3
D-fend water trap The D-fend water trap of the airway modules is based on a
hydrophobic membrane, which prevents water and secretions from
entering the measuring chamber. Condensed water and secretions
are collected into a washable container.
The green D-fend+ is for patients with extensive mucus secretion and
for single patient use only. Replace it every 24 hours or when a
message ‘Sample line blocked’ or ‘Replace D-fend’ persists.
Important D-fend alarm message instructions stay on the display in the
waveform field until the condition is resolved and Normal Screen is
pushed to clear the message.
• Check D-fend
• Check sample gas out
Emptying the water trap 1. To remove the D-fend water trap, push the water trap latch to the
right. The water trap is spring-loaded. The message, ‘Check D-
fend’ appears.
2. Detach the container from the water trap cartridge by pulling it
carefully downward.
3. Empty and clean the container.
4. Attach the container tightly back into the cartridge.
5. Push the whole unit into its housing on the front panel until the
latch is set.
Connection to a patient
1. Check that the airway gas module is properly installed. The
module may be installed at any time, but the measurements will
not be available until after the module has warmed up.
2. Check that the airway adapter connections are tight and that the
adapter is operating properly.
3. Check that the water trap container is empty and properly
attached.
4. Attach a new gas sampling line to the water trap.
5. Ensure the system switch is on. ‘Zeroing’ appears if the CO2
waveform is displayed.
5-4 M1205553
5 Airway Modules
6. When ‘Zeroing’ disappears, connect the loose end of the

sampling line to the airway adapter. Take the gas sample as
close to the patient’s airway as possible. Position the adapter’s
sampling port and spirometry port upwards to prevent condensed
water from entering the sampling line
AB.98.016
1. Module
2. Gas sampling line
3. Spirometry line (optional)
4. Spirometry airway adapter (optional)
Figure 5-2 • Breathing circuit setup with compact airway module
WARNING Do not place the airway module in the lower slot when the
airway module bay is on the right side of the system.
Exhaust from gas exhaust port will adversely affect the
airway gas module accuracy. The CO2 and O2
measurements from the module will be inaccurate.
AB.95.125
M1205553 5-5
Gas exchange
The Datex-Ohmeda compact airway modules with the gas exchange
option (E-COVX, E-CAiOVX, M-COVX, M-CAiOVX) will allow for the
monitoring of airway gases, patient spirometry, O2 consumption, CO2
production, energy expenditure and respiratory quotient.
The patient’s height and weight must be entered to calculate the O2
consumption per kg or m2, and to calculate the CO2 production per kg
or m2.
2. Select Parameters Setup - Gas Exchange Setup.
3. Enter patient’s height and weight. Body surface area will be
automatically calculated based on the values for height and
weight.
To obtain the O2 consumption of a patient, the module measures the
amount of oxygen that is inhaled and subtracts the amount exhaled
from it. Respectively, the module measures the CO2 production by
subtracting the amount of carbon dioxide inhaled from the amount
exhaled. These amounts can be obtained by multiplying each
measured volume sample by the corresponding gas concentration.
Measurement • The EE Average Time entered is the amount of time displayed in

limitations the EE/RQ Digit field. The time selected is also the range of time
used in the averaging of the RQ value. EE is calculated breath to
breath, regardless of the EE Average Time set.
• The gas exchange measurement does not function with a leaking
endotracheal tube.
• The gas exchange measurement does not function when the
ventilator bias flow is greater than 10 l/min.
• For continuous monitoring, use the HME(F) for humidification or
use the D-lite+. The condensed water inside the D-lite may distort
the volume readings.
• When FiO2 measures greater than 85% gas exchange values
become invalid.
• When respiratory rate measures greater than 35 breaths per
minute for D-lite and 50 breaths per minute for Pedi-lite,
spirometry values become invalid.
• When respiratory rate measures less than 4 or greater than 35
breaths per minute, gas exchange values become invalid.
• For the best measurement results, it is recommended to use:
• a two-meter gas sampling line
• a bacterial filter at the expiratory inlet
• a straight patient wye.
5-6 M1205553
5 Airway Modules
Patient spirometry
Modules with patient spirometry enable monitoring of the ventilator
operation and the patient respiratory status.
The airway pressures are to be measured between the patient wye
and patient airway, using the D-lite and Pedi-lite sensors. These
sensors can be used for gas sampling.
The sensors are designed to measure kinetic pressure by a two-sided
Pitot tube. The pressure differences across a flow restrictor together
with the gas concentration information is used to calculate flow. The
volume information is obtained by integrating the flow signal.
Note With spontaneous breaths, PEEPi, compliance, and airway
resistance are not measured. With pressure supported breaths,
PEEPi and airway resistance are not measured.
Measurement Pplat is the pressure measured at the point where the flow reverses
principles direction, at the end of the inspiration phase, after the inspiratory
pause.
Positive End Expiratory Pressure (PEEP) is displayed in two PEEP
values: PEEPe (extrinsic PEEP) reflects the PEEP set on the
ventilator. PEEPi (intrinsic PEEP) or AUTO PEEP usually indicates
incomplete expiration and should be minimized. PEEPe + PEEPi =
PEEPtot.
PEEPtot is the pressure in the lungs at the end of expiration,
measured at the moment when the expiratory phase changes to
inspiratory flow.
Compliance (Compl) is calculated for each breath from the following
equation: Compl = TVexp / (Pplat - PEEPe - PEEPi). Compliance
indicates the pressure difference needed to deliver a certain volume
of gas into the patient’s lungs.
Static measurements The airway module detects end inspiratory and end expiratory
occlusions automatically and calculates the values for static plateau
pressure (Static Plat), static extrinsic and intrinsic end expiratory
pressures (Static PEEPe+i) and static compliance (Static Compl).
A pause is defined as a period during which the flow stays smaller
than 2 l/min and during which the airway pressure changes are
smaller than 1 cmH2O. An end inspiratory/expiratory pause is
identified as an occlusion if:
• The inspiratory/expiratory pause lasts at least one second longer
than the inspiratory/expiratory pause in normal breaths
(comparison is done with the three previous normal breaths).
• The inspiration/expiration time is at least 1.5 seconds.
• During the last minute there have not been more than three
spontaneous breaths.
M1205553 5-7
The static compliance is calculated based on the measured static

plateau and end expiratory pressure values if:
• End inspiratory and expiratory occlusions are done within 2
minutes of each other.
• Ventilator settings have not changed between the occlusions.
• Dynamic PEEPtot < 2 cmH2O, Dynamic TV < 15%
• The difference between static plateau and end expiratory
pressures is greater than 3 cmH2O.
Static values are displayed in a separate digit field (Spiro).
Gas calibration
Calibrate compact airway modules once every two months or
whenever there are indications of errors in the gas readings. Use the
Datex-Ohmeda calibration gas and regulator specified for the
module.
WARNING Only use Datex-Ohmeda calibration gas. Do not use any

other calibration gases or the calibration will not succeed.
Specific part numbers for calibration gas and regulators are listed
below. Several modules use the same gas and regulator style.
E Modules M Modules Calibration Gas Regulator

E-miniC M-miniC
E-CO M-CO 755587 (US only)
E-COV M-COV 755581
M1006864 (US only)
E-COVX M-COVX
755534
E-CAiO M-CAiO
755571 (US only)
E-CAiOV M-CAiOV
755583
E-CAiOVX M-CAiOVX
During gas calibration % units are used for CO2 regardless of

selected measuring units.
1. Turn on the ventilator. Let the gas module warm up for 30
minutes before starting calibration.
2. Attach the regulator to the calibration gas cylinder.
3. Attach a new sampling line to the water trap. Connect the loose
end of the sampling line to the regulator on the calibration gas
cylinder.
5. Select Parameters Setup - Gas Calibration. Calibration will
begin as soon as the menu item is selected.
5-8 M1205553
5 Airway Modules
6. Wait until ‘Feed Gas’ appears after each gas.

7. Open the regulator and feed calibration gas until the message
‘OK’ or ‘Adjust’ appears.
• If an error occurs during calibration or if no gas is fed, ‘Cal.
Error’ appears after each gas. Push the ComWheel to
perform a new calibration.
8. If adjustments are needed:
• Select the gas to be adjusted and press the ComWheel.
• Use the ComWheel to change the value until it matches the
calibration gas cylinder value.
• Push the ComWheel to confirm the change.
• Repeat for each gas requiring adjustment.
M1205553 5-9
5-10 M1205553
CAUTION Repairs should only be attempted by a trained

Datex-Ohmeda service representative or by persons
having completed Datex-Ohmeda approved service
training. See “Repair policy” in the “Cleaning and
Maintenance” Section 7 of this manual.
w If an alarm occurs, safeguard the patient first before

performing troubleshooting or doing repair procedures.
In this section Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

List of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
M1205553 6-1
Alarms
Alarms may be high priority, medium priority, or informational. When
an alarm occurs during therapy, an alarm tone sounds and the alarm
message is displayed in the alarm message field.
Push the Silence Alarms key to silence the audible parameter
alarm tones. Silencing an alarm stops the audible tone for 120
seconds. Push the key again to reset timer to 120 seconds.
Pushing the Silence Alarms key when no medium or high priority
alarms are active suspends audible parameter alarm tones for
medium and high parameter alarms for 120 seconds. Push the key
again to cancel the alarm suspend timer.
Alarm help is available for any recent or active alarms. Push Help to
view the cause and action of the alarms.
Alarm priorities Alarm priority is indicated by the color of the alarm message and the
alarm LED located next to the Silence Alarms key.
High Priority alarms High-priority alarm messages appear in white text on a red
background. During a high-priority alarm, the red LED flashes. A
high-priority alarm consists of a series of 5 tones.
If a high-priority alarm is not silenced or resolved within the time set in
the High Alert Audio menu item in the Alarms Setup menu, the pitch,
volume and tone of the alarm will automatically increase to the
maximum level. See “High Alert Audio” in Section 4 for detailed
information.
Medium-priority alarm messages appear in yellow text on a gray
background. During a medium-priority alarm, the yellow LED flashes.
A medium-priority alarm consists of a series of 3 tones.
Informational alarms appear in white text on a gray background.
During an informational alarm, the yellow LED is on solid.
Informational alarms consist of a single tone.
When a high-priority alarm is active at the same time as a medium-
priority alarm, the red and yellow LEDs flash. When a high-priority
alarm is active at the same time as an informational alarm, the red
LED flashes, and the yellow LED is on solid. When a medium-priority
alarm is active at the same time as an informational alarm, the yellow
LED flashes.
Pushing the Silence Alarms key stops the LEDs from flashing, de-
escalates some medium-priority alarms, and silences the audio tones
until the end of the alarm silence. Alarm text will still be displayed
after Silence Alarms has been pushed.
Some alarms continue to display an alarm message after the
condition has cleared. These alarms are resolved and may be
cleared by pushing Silence Alarms. Resolved alarms appear as
white messages on a black background.
6-2 M1205553
Display changes Messages may appear in waveform fields during some alarms. If
during alarms more than one alarm has a message, the message for the highest
priority alarm is displayed. The message is removed when the alarm
is cleared.
Messages for high-priority alarms use red text. Messages for
medium-priority alarms use yellow text. Informational alarms use gray
text.
Internal failure ‘System failure. Service required.’ will show on the display during a
software or hardware failure detected by the system. If this message
occurs, contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service representative.
The system will show one of the following messages if a hardware
failure is detected while the system is powering up:
• No bootable device available.
• CMOS battery is weak. Please replace.
• Alarm speaker not detected. Check connection.
• Corrupted CMOS was reset.
• RTC date/time error. Battery may be weak
• Watchdog circuit failed.
• RAM memory error.
• CPU data cache fault.
• System reset: ECxx xx xx
• Program load failed - CRC.
The system will show the following message if a failure is detected
during therapy or while the system is powering up:
• System failure. Service required.
If any of these messages appears, discontinue use and contact a
Datex-Ohmeda trained service representative.
Backup audio buzzer The Engström is equipped with a backup audio buzzer. If both the
primary and backup audio tones do not sound when the ventilator is
powered up, take the ventilator out of service and contact a Datex-
Ohmeda trained service representative.
Battery indicator The battery indicator located at the top right of the display (below the
clock) indicates remaining power when utilizing battery power. The
On battery alarm sounds when the system is using battery power.
Battery alarms sound at 30, 20, 10, 5 and 1 minute intervals to alert
the user of remaining system power.
The color and fill amount of the battery in use symbol indicates the
amount of battery power remaining. Green indicates greater than 10
minutes of battery power remaining. Yellow indicates between 5 and
10 minutes battery power remaining. Red indicates less than five
minutes of battery power remaining.
M1205553 6-3
List of alarms
If the corrective action does not resolve the alarm message, contact a
Alarm messages with an * after the priority in the table continue to
display an alarm message after the condition has cleared.
Message Priority Potential Cause Action/Concerns

Air supply pressure Informational Air supply pressure > 655kPa 1. Ensure the primary air source is < 655
high (95 psi / 6.55 bar). kPa (95 psi / 6.55 bar).
2. Switch to 100% O2.
Air supply pressure Medium* Air pipeline pressure < 168 1. Ensure the primary air source is properly
low kPa (24.3 psi / 1.68 bar). connected and > 168 kPa (24.3 psi / 1.68
bar).
2. Patient will be ventilated on 100% O2.
Air temp high High Air supply temperature > or = 1. Check compressor filter, clean filter if
48 C. needed.
2. Turn off compressor.
Air temp sensor error Informational Air temperature sensor Switch to 100% O2.
measurement out of range.
Ambient temp sensor Medium Ambient temperature sensor is 1. Contact a trained service representative.
error not reading correctly. 2. Volume delivery and monitoring may be
inaccurate.
Apnea High* Patient has not triggered a 1. Check the patient's status.
breath within the set apnea 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
time. 3. Check for patient disconnection.
4. Appropriately set the Apnea Time in the
Alarms Setup menu.
Apnea alarm off Medium Apnea alarm is turned off for Ensure the Apnea alarm setting is
non-invasive ventilation. appropriate for the patient’s condition.
Backup audio failure Medium Secondary speaker failure. Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
representative.
Backup mode active Medium Spontaneous breathing is 1. Ensure the patient's spontaneous
insufficient. breathing and ventilatory support are
adequate.
2. To end Backup ventilation, select a
different mode in the Vent Setup menu.
Breathing circuit High* The inspiratory pressure is > 1. Check for a blocked filter.
occlusion 10 cmH2O higher than the 2. Check for a foreign body or occlusion in
expiratory pressure. the patient circuit.
3. Ensure the gas exhaust port is not
obstructed.
Cannot calculate Informational The last attempted FRC 1. Ensure airway module is available and
FRC measurement could not be active.
completed. 2. Stop any active procedures.
3. Start a new FRC measurement.
4. Ventilation setting changes will stop an
FRC measurement.
Check D-fend Informational or Airway module sample line or 1. Ensure D-fend water trap is properly
Medium water trap is blocked. placed.
2. Ensure the sample line is connected.
3. Wait 30 s before pressing Normal
Screen to resume gas sampling.
6-4 M1205553

Check sample gas Informational or Possible blockage in airway 1. Check for blockage in the airway module
out Medium module sample gas outlet. sample gas outlet.
2. Wait 30 s before pressing Normal
Screen to resume gas sampling.
Circuit leak? High* The measured leak is greater 1. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
than the set Leak Limit 2. Appropriately set the Leak Limit in the
percentage. Alarms Setup menu.
3. Clean expiratory flow sensor.
Circuit leak alarm off Medium Leak Limit setting is turned off. Ensure the Leak Limit setting is
appropriate for the patient's condition.
Clean neo flow Medium Neonatal flow sensor is Clean or replace neonatal flow sensor.
sensor contaminated with debris.
Connect nebulizer Informational Nebulizer cable is not attached 1. Connect nebulizer cable and nebulizer.
to ventilator when nebulization 2. Nebulization will automatically resume
function is activated. when nebulizer is reconnected.
Display fans failed Medium The display unit cooling fans Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
have failed. representative.
EtCO2 high High* End tidal CO2 > high alarm 1. Check the patient's status.
limit. 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit or
airway.
3. Ensure the ventilator settings are
4. Appropriately set the EtCO2 high alarm
limit in the Alarms Setup menu.
EtCO2 low High* End tidal CO2 < low alarm 1. Check the patient's status.
limit. 2. Check patient's tube placement and
seal.
3. Check for leaks or obstructions in the
patient circuit.
5. Appropriately set the EtCO2 low alarm
EtO2 high Medium* End tidal oxygen > high alarm 1. Check if additional O2 flow is being
limit. added to the patient circuit (airway module
only).
3. Appropriately set the EtO2 high alarm
EtO2 low Medium* End tidal oxygen < low alarm 1. Ensure the sampling line is connected
limit. correctly.
3. Appropriately set the EtO2 low alarm
Exp flow sensor error Medium Expiratory flow sensor is not 1. Check if additional flow is being added
reading correctly. to the patient circuit.
2. Clean or replace expiratory flow sensor.
Exp flow sensor High Ventilator is not receiving data 1. Run the Checkout to recalibrate the
failure from the expiratory flow expiratory flow sensor.
sensor. 2. Replace flow sensor if necessary.
Fans require service Medium The ventilator unit or power 1. Check ventilator filter, clean if necessary.
module fans have failed. 2. System may overheat if both fans fail.
M1205553 6-5

FiO2 control error Medium Not receiving data from the air 1. Run the Checkout to recalibrate the air
flow sensor or O2 flow sensor. and oxygen flow sensors.
2. Contact a trained Datex-Ohmeda
service representative.
FiO2 high High* Inspired fraction of oxygen > 1. Check if additional O2 flow is being
high alarm limit. added to the patient circuit (airway module
only).
2. Appropriately set the FiO2 high alarm
3. Complete a Checkout or Gas
Calibration.
FiO2 low High* Inspired fraction of oxygen < 1. Ensure O2 gas supply is adequate.
low alarm limit. 2. Appropriately set the FiO2 low alarm
3. Complete a Checkout or Gas
Calibration.
FRC series stopped Informational* The O2 setting was changed 1. Start FRC series with desired FRC O2
during an FRC series interval setting.
to within 10% of the FRC O2 2. FRC O2 setting must be at least 10%
setting. from the current O2 setting to prevent
termination.
Missed scheduled Informational* A series FRC measurement 1. Ensure airway module is available and
FRC could not be started. active.
2. Stop any active procedures.
3. Start a new FRC measurement.
4. Ventilation setting changes will stop an
FRC measurement.
5. The FRC measurement will attempt at
the next scheduled interval.
Mixed gas temp Informational Total flow temperature sensor Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
sensor error measurement is out of range. representative.
Module fail. No CO2, Medium Airway module hardware Replace airway module.
O2 data. failure.
Module not Informational The airway module detected is Remove the incompatible module.
compatible not compatible with system
software.
MVexp high High* Expired minute volume > high 1. Check the patient's status.
alarm limit. 2. Ensure the ventilator settings are
3. Appropriately set the MVexp high alarm
MVexp low High* Expired minute volume < low 1. Check the patient's status.
alarm limit. 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit or
airway.
4. Appropriately set the MVexp low alarm
MVexp low alarm off Medium MVexp low alarm limit is turned Ensure the MVexp low alarm limit is
off for non-invasive ventilation. appropriate for the patient’s condition.
Negative airway High* Ventilator senses a patient 1. Check for blockages in the patient
pressure inspiration at less than -10 circuit.
cmH2O. 2. Ensure Trigger is appropriately set.
Neo flow sensor High Neonatal flow sensor is not 1. Check if additional flow is being added
error reading correctly. to the patient circuit.
2. Clean or replace neonatal flow sensor.
6-6 M1205553

Neo flow sensor Off Medium Neo Flow Sensor has been 1. Turn On the neonatal flow sensor in the
turned Off. Neo Flow Sensor Setup menu.
2. The ventilator flow sensors will be used
for volume monitoring while the Neo Flow
Sensor is turned Off.
Neo flow sensor High Neonatal flow sensor is not 1. Switch the orientation of the neonatal
reversed installed correctly. flow sensor.
2. Reconnect the neonatal flow sensor.
No battery backup Medium Battery is disconnected, 1. The ventilator will shutdown if AC mains
missing, or has failed. power is lost.
2. Prepare to disconnect the patient from
the ventilator and manually ventilate.
No battery backup? Medium Communication between the 1. The ventilator may shutdown if AC
power controller and the mains power is lost.
display is lost. 2. Prepare to disconnect the patient from
No D-lite sensor? High The module is not detecting 1. Ensure the D-lite sensor is properly
any pressure or flow connected in the patient circuit.
measurements. 2. Switch the Data Source to Vent in the
Parameters Setup menu.
No exp flow sensor High Exhalation flow sensor not 1. Ensure flow sensor is properly
connected. connected.
2. Install expiratory flow sensor.
3. Replace the flow sensor if necessary.
No gas supply High Both O2 and Air supply 1. Ensure O2 and Air supplies are properly
pressure pressures < 168 kPa (24.3 psi connected.
/ 1.68 bar). 2. Start compressor if available.
No neo flow sensor High Neonatal flow sensor not 1. Ensure neonatal flow sensor is properly
connected while ventilating. connected.
2. Replace the neonatal flow sensor.
3. Turn off the Neo Flow Sensor in the Neo
Flow Sensor Setup menu.
4. Volume monitoring is disabled while the
neonatal flow sensor is disconnected.
for volume control, volume monitoring, and
flow monitoring when the neonatal flow
sensor is turned off.
No neo flow sensor Informational Neonatal flow sensor not 1. Ensure neonatal flow sensor is properly
connected while in Standby. connected.
3. Calibrate or turn off the Neo flow sensor
in the Neo Flow Sensor Setup menu.
5. The ventilator flow sensor will be used
No patient effort High Patient has not triggered a 1. Check the patient's status.
spontaneous breath within the 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
set Patient Effort time. 3. Check for patient disconnection.
4. Appropriately set the Patient Effort time
in the Alarms Setup menu.
M1205553 6-7

O2 sensor failure Medium Data from the O2 sensor is out Complete the Checkout with both Air and
of range. O2 to recalibrate the O2 sensor.
O2 supply pressure Informational O2 supply pressure > 655 kPa 1. Ensure the primary O2 source is < 655
high (95 psi / 6.55 bar). kPa (95 psi / 6.55 bar).
2. Switch to Air.
O2 supply pressure Medium* O2 supply is < 168kPa (24.3 1. Ensure primary O2 source is properly
low psi / 1.68 bar). connected and > 168kPa (24.3 psi / 1.68
bar).
2. Patient will be ventilated on 100% Air.
O2 temp sensor error Informational Oxygen temperature sensor If the system does not return to the set
measurement is out of range. FiO2, switch to Air.
On battery Medium AC Mains power is not Plug power cord in.
available. Ventilator is
powered by battery.
Pair sensor out of Informational Air supply pressure sensor Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
range measurement is out of range. representative.
Patient connected? High The ventilator senses a patient 1. Start ventilation.
connected to the circuit while 2. Disconnect patient from circuit.
in Standby. 3. Ensure the circuit is not connected to the
test plug.
4. Ensure the circuit is not occluded.
5. Select Park Circuit in the Standby menu
if the patient has been disconnected and
the circuit is intentionally occluded.
Patient connection High* The measured leak is greater 1. Check for leaks at the patient connection
leak? than the set Leak Limit of the circuit.
percentage. 2. Appropriately set the Leak Limit in the
Alarms Setup Menu.
Patient disconnected High* Patient circuit is disconnected 1. Reconnect the patient to the ventilator.
from the ventilator or 2. Appropriately set Tdisconnect in the
disconnect has been present Alarms Setup menu.
for more than the set non- 3. Select Standby in the Standby menu.
invasive Tdisconnect.
Patient disconnected Informational Patient circuit is disconnected 1. Check the patient's status.
from the ventilator. 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
3. Check for patient disconnection.
Paux high Medium Paux > high alarm limit. 1. Appropriately set the Paux high alarm
2. Check for blockages in the tubing.
3. Ensure Purge Flow is turned off when
connected to a close-ended system.
Paux sensor out of Informational Auxiliary pressure sensor 1. Disconnect the patient end of the
range measurement is out of range. auxiliary pressure tubing.
2. Select Paux Zero in the Paux Setup
menu.
Pbaro sensor out of Informational Barometric pressure sensor Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
range measurement is out of range. representative.
PEEPe high Medium PEEPe > high alarm limit. 1. Ensure the ventilator settings are
2. Appropriately set the PEEPe high alarm
PEEPe low Medium PEEPe < low alarm limit. 1. Ensure the ventilator settings are
2. Appropriately set the PEEPe low alarm
6-8 M1205553

PEEPe low High Airway pressure < PEEPe low 1. Reconnect the patient to the ventilator.
alarm limit. 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
3. Appropriately set the PEEPe low alarm
4. Increase the Bias Flow.
PEEPi high Medium PEEPi > high alarm limit. 1. Ensure the ventilator settings are
2. Appropriately set the PEEPi high alarm
Pexp sensor out of Informational or Expiratory pressure sensor 1. Run the Checkout to zero the expiratory
range High* measurement is out of range. pressure sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the patient
circuit.
Pinsp sensor out of Informational or Inspiratory pressure sensor Complete the Checkout to zero the
range High* measurement is out of range. inspiratory pressure sensor.
Plimit reached Medium Plimit value has been 1. Ensure the Plimit, Pmax, and TV
approached for 3 consecutive settings are appropriate for the patient's
breaths. condition.
2. Ensure the pneumatic nebulizer flow
setting is correct.
PO2 sensor out of Informational Oxygen supply pressure 1. Complete Checkout with both gas
range sensor measurement is out of supplies.
range. 2. Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained
Ppeak high High* Airway pressure > Pmax alarm 1. Ensure the circuit is not obstructed.
limit. 2. Ensure the ventilator settings are
3. Appropriately set the Pmax or the High
Ppeak alarm setting.
Ppeak low High* Airway pressure < Low Ppeak 1. Ensure the circuit is connected to the
alarm limit for 15 seconds or 1 patient's airway.
mechanical breath, whichever 2. Ensure there are no leaks or
is greater. disconnections in the circuit.
3. Ensure the ventilator setting values are
correct.
4. Appropriately set the Low Ppeak alarm
Pressure sensor High Pexp - Pinsp > 10 cmH2O. 1. Ensure the expiratory pressure port is
failure not obstructed.
2. Run the Checkout to recalibrate the
pressure sensors.
Primary audio failure High Speaker failure. Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
representative.
Relief valve failure High Relief valve failed during 1. Run the Checkout to retest the relief
Checkout. valve.
2. Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained
Relief valve opened High* High Paw detected. Ventilator 1. Check for a blocked filter.
automatically opens relief 2. Ensure the circuit is not obstructed.
valve to relieve pressure. 3. Ensure the ventilator settings are
4. Ensure the Pmax or the High Ppeak
setting is correct.
5. Ensure the gas exhaust port is not
obstructed.
M1205553 6-9

Remove airway Informational An airway module is installed Remove the airway module.
module when the patient type is set to
Neonatal.
Replace D-fend Medium Residue is built up in D-fend Replace D-fend.
filter.
Replace neo flow Medium Ventilator is receiving invalid Replace neonatal flow sensor.
sensor data from the neonatal flow
sensor.
RR high Medium* Respiratory rate > high alarm 1. Ensure Trigger is appropriately set.
limit. 2. Ensure the ventilator settings are
3. Appropriately set the RR high alarm limit
RR low High* Respiratory rate < low alarm 1. Check the patient's status.
limit. 2. Ensure RR is appropriately set.
3. Ensure Trigger is appropriately set.
4. Appropriately set the RR low alarm limit
Sample line blocked Informational or Airway module sample line or 1. Empty water trap.
Medium water trap is blocked. 2. Ensure sample line is not kinked or
blocked.
3. Replace sample line if necessary.
SBT ends < 2 Informational The time remaining for the 1. When the SBT time expires the
minutes Spontaneous Breathing Trial is ventilator will return to the previous mode
less than 2 minutes. and settings.
2. Select Adopt Settings in the SBT menu
to continue with the current mode and
settings.
Sustained Paw High* Inspiratory or expiratory airway 1. Ensure the circuit is not obstructed.
pressure sustained at a level 2. Ensure the gas exhaust port is not
10 cmH2O higher than the obstructed.
PEEP or Plow setting for 15 3. Ensure expiratory filter is not obstructed,
seconds. if used.
System shutdown in High Remaining battery power is 1. Connect to AC mains power.
<1 min less than one minute. 2. Disconnect the patient from the
ventilator and manually ventilate.
System shutdown in High Remaining battery power is 1. Connect to AC mains power.
<5 min less than five minutes. 2. Prepare to disconnect the patient from
System shutdown in High Remaining battery power is Connect to AC mains power.
<10 min less than ten minutes.
System shutdown in High Remaining battery power is Connect to AC mains power.
<20 min less than twenty minutes.
Temp high. High Ventilator is overheating. 1. Check ventilator filter, clean if necessary.
Shutdown possible. 2. Ensure nothing is blocking the ventilator
fan filter.
TV not achieved Medium TVinsp < 80% of the set TV, or 1. Ensure the Plimit, Pmax, and TV
(Adult or Pediatric) set TV - 5 ml, whichever is settings are appropriate for the patient's
greater, for six consecutive condition.
breaths. 2. Ensure the pneumatic nebulizer flow
setting is correct.
TV not achieved Medium TVinsp < 80% of the set TV, or 1. Ensure the Plimit, Pmax, and TV
(Neonatal) set TV - 1 ml, whichever is settings are appropriate for the patient's
greater, for six consecutive condition.
breaths. 2. Ensure the pneumatic nebulizer flow
setting is correct.
6-10 M1205553

TVexp high Medium* Expired tidal volume > high 1. Check the patient's status.
3. Appropriately set the TVexp high alarm
TVexp low Medium* Expired tidal volume < low 1. Check the patient's status.
3. Appropriately set the TVexp low alarm
Volume delivery error High Not receiving data from the Contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
total flow sensor. representative.
*These alarms continue to display an alarm message after the condition has cleared.
M1205553 6-11
Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution

Mains indicator is The electrical power cord is not • Connect the power cord.
not on. properly connected. • Loosen the power cord
retaining clamp and ensure
plug is fully seated, then tighten
the retaining clamp.
The inlet circuit breaker (switch) is • Turn the circuit breaker on.
off.
The power cord is damaged. • Replace the power cord.
The electrical outlet the power • Use a different electrical outlet.
cord connects to has no power.
An internal fuse is open. • Have a Datex-Ohmeda trained
service representative repair
the system.
Display unit cable is loose. • Turn system switch off and
disconnect from AC mains
power.
• Check and tighten the display
unit connectors.
System cannot be Ventilator is not in Standby. • Set the ventilator to Standby
turned off. and turn system switch off.
No communication Airway module is not properly • Remove and replace module in
with the compact installed. the module bay.
airway module. Cable connecting the module bay • Check and tighten the module
to the ventilator chassis is loose. bay connectors.
Backup audio alarm System failure. • Have a Datex-Ohmeda trained
sounds. service representative repair
the ventilator.
Display unit cable is loose. • Turn system switch off and
disconnect from AC mains
power.
• Check and tighten the display
unit connectors.
An alarm appears Alarm is from the ventilator but the • Calibrate the airway module.
when the data is value displayed is from the airway • Change selection for Data
within range. module. Source in the
Parameters Setup menu.
‘Ppeak high’ alarm conditions are • No action required.
checked before the display is • In certain situations the
updated. ventilator will react to a
transient high pressure
situation before the data can be
sampled for display.
Ventilator does not Plimit setting prevents the full TV • Change TV settings.
deliver set TV in from being delivered in the • Change the Plimit setting.
VCV or SIMV-VC inspiratory period.
modes.
Ventilator does not Pmax alarm limit is limiting • Change Pmax setting.
deliver set TV in delivered inspiratory pressure. • See Section 8 for more detailed
PCV-VG, SIMV- information.
PCVG, BiLevel-VG Ventilator is at minimum allowed • Change ventilation settings.
modes. delivery.
Ventilator transitions ‘MVexp low’ or ‘Apnea’ alarm and • Change ventilation settings.
to Backup mode. insufficient patient ventilation.
6-12 M1205553

Short delay in the Automatic pressure transducer • No action required.
breath cycle at the zeroing interference. • Situation will be corrected
PEEP pressure when zeroing is complete.
level. Automatic flow sensor zeroing • No action required.
interference. • Situation will be corrected
when zeroing is complete.
Ventilator is The breathing circuit leak rate is • Check the breathing circuit for
automatically higher than the flow trigger level. leaks.
triggering a breath. • Increase the Flow triggering
level or change from Flow
triggering to Pressure
triggering.
• Ensure the Patient Type is set
correctly.
TV, compliance and The Checkout was not done with • Complete the Checkout with
resistance values the current patient circuit. the same breathing circuit that
are inaccurate. will be used on the patient.
The Checkout fails. Water trap on the exhalation valve • Ensure the water trap is
is not on tightly. screwed on tightly.
Patient circuit not connected to the • Attach patient circuit to
ventilator. inspiratory and expiratory
ports.
Patient wye is not properly • Ensure the patient wye is
occluded. occluded completely with the
leak test plug.
Expiratory flow sensor has failed. • Clean or replace the flow
sensor. Ensure flow sensor is
properly connected.
Exhalation valve and seals are not • Remove exhalation valve and
properly seated. replace.
A connection port on the patient • Ensure all connection ports are
circuit is open. occluded.
Leak in patient circuit is very large. • Check the breathing circuit for
leaks.
Checkout was stopped before it • Allow Checkout to complete.
completed
Touchscreen is not The touchscreen is locked. • Press the Lock/unlock key on
working the left side of the display.
The touchscreen is not turned On. • Turn Touchscreen On. See
“Turning the Touchscreen On
or Off” in Section 10.
• Have a Datex-Ohmeda trained
service representative repair
the ventilator.
M1205553 6-13
6-14 M1205553
In this section Repair policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Maintenance summary and schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning and sterilization information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning and sterilization (ISO 17664 compliant). . . . . . . . 7-12
Aeroneb Pro nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
M1205553 7-1
Repair policy
Do not use malfunctioning equipment. Make all necessary repairs or
have the equipment serviced by an authorized Datex-Ohmeda
service representative. After repair, test the equipment to ensure that
it is functioning properly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published specifications.
To help ensure full reliability, replacement and maintenance of those
parts listed in this manual may be undertaken by a competent, trained
individual having completed a Datex-Ohmeda service training
program.
CAUTION Repairs should only be performed by a GE Healthcare

Authorized representative or by service personnel having
experience with this type of equipment.
Replace damaged parts with components manufactured, sold, or
recommended by Datex-Ohmeda. Then test the unit to ascertain that
it complies with the manufacturer’s published specifications.
Circuit diagrams, parts lists, and calibration instructions are available
to properly trained individuals. Contact the local Datex-Ohmeda Field
Service Representative for service assistance.
Maintenance summary and schedule
Datex-Ohmeda This is the minimum level of maintenance recommended by Datex-

approved service Ohmeda. Local regulations may contain additional maintenance
requirements. Datex-Ohmeda advocates compliance with local
regulations which meet or exceed this minimum level of maintenance.
Circuit diagrams, parts lists and calibration instructions, which will
assist qualified personnel to repair the equipment, are available.
Minimum Frequency Maintenance

5000 hours or 12 • Have a Datex-Ohmeda trained service
months, whichever person complete the scheduled service
comes first maintenance checks, tests, calibrations
and parts replacement as defined in the
Technical Reference manual.
To determine the number of hours the system has run, select System
Setup - System Status.
7-2 M1205553
User maintenance Calibrations should be completed every 6 months, whenever

performance is questioned (such as a failure of checkout), or when
associated components are serviced or replaced. Calibrations can be
completed more frequently, as needed, for optimal performance.
Minimum Frequency Maintenance

During cleaning and • Inspect the parts for damage. Replace or
setup repair as necessary.
As necessary • Empty the water trap on the exhalation
valve housing.
• Empty the water trap on the air pipeline
inlet fitting and replace the filter.
• Remove and clean the fan filters.
• Clean and replace the expiratory flow
sensor.
• Clean and replace the neonatal flow
sensor.
Monthly • Complete a Backlight Test*.
Every two months • Complete Gas Calibration*, if using an
airway module.
Every six months • Complete calibrations for the O2 Flow
Control Valve*, Air Flow Control Valve*,
and the Exhalation Valve*
Annually • Check performance of internal battery.
• Schedule annual service and
maintenance check for Engström system,
Airway module, and EVair compressor.
If the Engström System is transported off of facility grounds, complete

calibrations for the O2 Flow Control Valve*, Air Flow Control Valve*, and the
Exhalation Valve*.
*See “Calibration menus” in Section 10 for more information.
Recommended part
replacement period
Recommended
Replacement Period
(Whichever occurs first)
Item Interval Number of
Cleaning Cycles
Exhalation Valve Assembly 12 months 50
1505-8568-000
Diaphragm 12 months 50
1505-3224-000
Adult Flow Sensor 6 months 50
1505-3231-000
Neonatal Flow Sensor 6 months 25
1505-3272-000
M1205553 7-3
Checking system status

To view the System Status menu, push System Setup and select
System Status. The System Status menu provides information on:
• O2 pressure.
• Air pressure.
• Internal battery status.
• System software revision number.
• Altitude.
• Hours the system has logged.
• Last airway module calibration.
Important The last airway module calibration will not appear until the module is
warmed up.
Battery performance Internal batteries must undergo a discharge test annually.

test
WARNING Check performance of battery annually; replace when

necessary.
1. Connect the Engström to AC mains power for 8 hours to ensure
the batteries are fully charged.
2. Connect a breathing circuit and test lung to the ventilator.
3. Set the following parameters:
• Mode: BiLevel
• Rate: 12/min
• I:E: 1:2
• Pinsp: 20 cmH2O
• PEEP: 5 cmH2O
• Bias Flow: 4 l/min
4. Start ventilation.
5. Unplug the power cord from AC mains.
6. If the batteries continue to power the ventilator for > 60 minutes,
the batteries have sufficient charge. If the batteries do not power
the ventilator for > 60 minutes contact a Datex-Ohmeda trained
service representative to replace the batteries.
7. Connect the Engström to AC mains power for 8 hours to ensure
the batteries are fully charged before using.
7-4 M1205553
EVair 03 compressor Schedule preventive maintenance as defined in the Technical

maintenance Reference manual, annually, or every 5000 pump hours, whichever
occurs first.
The compressor pump will need to be replaced approximately every
10,000 hours. Check the timer on the compressor control panel. Call
service representative when time is nearing 10,000 hours.
CAUTION Compressor weighs approximately 40 kg (88 lb), do not

remove from the ventilator cart without proper service
tools.
Airway module
preventive
maintenance Minimum frequency Maintenance
Daily • Replace the D-fend.
Every two months • Complete Gas Calibration*.
Annually • Schedule annual maintenance
check.
*See “Calibration menus” in section 10 for more information.
M1205553 7-5
Cleaning and sterilization information

Datex-Ohmeda recommends cleaning and sterilizing between
patients. Cleaning solutions must have a pH of 7.0 - 10.5. Consult
your hospital guidelines for specific cleaning and sterilizing
guidelines.
WARNING Do not attempt to clean or sterilize components while

ventilating a patient.
CAUTION Do not use abrasives, sharp tools, or any

methods that may damage the surface of the
parts.
w Do not exceed 135° C during sterilization.
Cleaning Use a damp cloth with mild detergent to clean all external surfaces.
For parts that may be removed and submersed:
1. Wash and soak parts in mild detergent and warm tap water for a
minimum of 15 minutes.
2. Rinse thoroughly in cold water followed by hot water.
3. Dry in room air, allowing cavities to drain.
4. Check for cracks or damage, and replace if any defects are
visible.
Sterilization Only specified parts marked 134° C are autoclavable. See

“Component processing compatibility” table for more information.
1. Wash parts to clean, following the Cleaning procedure.

2. Autoclave at 134°C for a maximum of 20 minutes and cool to
room temperature.
Note Small imperfections within the plastic are normal after repeated
sterilization cycles and do not affect the functionality of the parts.
7-6 M1205553
Component Use the table below to select the appropriate processing method for
processing components. Components that are compatible with the component
process are marked “Yes”. Components that are not compatible with
compatibility the component process are marked “No”.
WARNING The following cleaning/disinfection agents have been

validated for material compatibility only. The effectiveness
of the chemical disinfectants and sterilants has not been
validated.
Component Process method

Mild
Ethyl CIDEX Autoclave at
detergent Sporox II Cidex NU-CIDEX
Alcohol OPA 121°C or
and warm Plus
134°C
water
Expiratory flow Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
sensor
Exhalation Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
valve housing
(includes
diaphragm,
o-ring, and water
trap)
Fan filters Yes No No No No No No
Aeroneb Pro Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Nebulizer
Water trap Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
(cart mounted)
Cables Yes Yes No No No No No
External Yes No No No No No No
surfaces
Neo Flow Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Sensor
Display Unit (DU) Yes Yes No No No No No
(Screen Surfaces)
EView Yes No No No No No No
(External Surfaces)
CAUTION Use of non-validated cleaning products will void part

warranties.
M1205553 7-7
CIDEX PLUS Datex-Ohmeda has verified the components in the preceding table
disinfection method are compatible with this procedure.
1. Immerse component completely in CIDEX PLUS solution for 20
minutes.
2. Remove component from solution and completely drain solution
from any cavities.
3. Thoroughly rinse component by completely immersing in a large
volume (2 gallons) of sterile or potable water for a minimum of 1
minute. Remove the component from water and completely drain
cavities. Discard water.
4. Repeat rinsing procedure 2 additional times for a total of 3 rinses.
(Discard water between rinses.)
5. Air dry component until it is completely dry.
6. Refer to CIDEX PLUS “DIRECTIONS FOR USE” for additional
information.
CIDEX OPA Datex-Ohmeda has verified the components in the preceding table
disinfection method are compatible with this procedure.
1. Immerse component completely in CIDEX OPA solution for 12
minutes.
2. Remove component from solution and completely drain solution
from any cavities.
minute. Remove from water and completely drain cavities.
Discard water.
4. Repeat rinsing procedure 2 additional times for a total of 3 rinses.
(Discard water between rinses.)
5. Air dry component until it is completely dry.
6. Refer to CIDEX OPA “DIRECTIONS FOR USE” for additional
information.
7-8 M1205553
Fan filters Clean both the display and ventilator fan filters as follows.
Note Do not autoclave the filters.
1. Remove the display fan filter by sliding the filter holder down from
the display housing.
AB.98.307
2. Remove the ventilator unit fan filter by inserting a thin blade tool
into the groove and prying the filter cover off of the back of the
system. Do not remove the screws holding the fan filter in place.
AB.98.055
3. Rinse the filters with clean water.

4. Allow the filters to dry.
5. Reinsert the filters.
Note Reinsert the ventilator unit fan filter cover with the smooth side facing
out.
M1205553 7-9
Support arm The support arm is not a sterile component and cannot be autoclaved
or immersed in cleaning solution.
Use a damp cloth with mild detergent to clean the support arm.
EVair 03 compressor Use a damp cloth with mild detergent to clean external surfaces.
Air inlet filter Check the air inlet filter before each use, daily when in use, and clean
or replace filter, as required.
1. Pull the air inlet filter out of the compressor housing.
2. Rinse with water to clean. Allow to dry.
3. Slide a new or clean filter into the compressor housing.
Drain bottle Empty the drain bottle when needed.

1. Unsnap the drain bottle from the top.
2. Empty the contents.
Note Dispose of contents according to local regulations.
3. Replace the drain bottle.
7-10 M1205553
Airway module
components
Airway adapter Replace the single-use adapter after each patient.
A reusable adapter can be disinfected with glutaraldehyde or alcohol.
A reusable steel adapter may be autoclaved.
To clean the adapter before use, submerge the adapter in 70%
alcohol solution for 30 seconds and rinse carefully with water. Ensure
all traces of alcohol or detergent are rinsed away or dried before
connecting to the patient.
Sampling line Do not reuse the sampling line. Reusing a cleaned sampling line may
affect measurement results.
D-fend water trap The water trap container can be cleaned with disinfecting solutions or
sterilized using cold chemicals or ethylene oxide.
CAUTION Do not disinfect or open the water trap cartridge. Do not

touch the water trap membrane. The hydrophobic
membrane is damaged if any cleaning is attempted other
than rinsing with water.
To lengthen the lifetime of your module and to minimize downtime:
• Empty the water trap container whenever it is more than half full.
• Do not open, wash, or sterilize the water trap cartridge.
• After washing or disinfecting the airway adapter or water trap
container, make sure there is no alcohol nor detergent left when
used again. Traces of alcohol or other organic cleaning solutions
may affect measurement.
• Do not force air or oxygen through the water trap.
• Do not allow smoke or dust to enter the water trap.
If a message ‘Sample line blocked’ appears:
• Replace the sampling line.
• Empty the water trap container.
M1205553 7-11
Cleaning and sterilization (ISO 17664 compliant)

The instructions provided have been validated by the manufacturer of
the medical device as being capable of preparing a medical device for
reuse.
The ISO 17664 compliance standard states: “It is the responsibility of
the processor to ensure that the reprocessing as actually performed
using equipment, materials, and personnel in the reprocessing facility
achieve the desired result. This normally requires validation and
routine monitoring of the process.”
Autoclave sterilization for the following components has been
validated and instructions for these methods have been written to be
in compliance with ISO 17664:2004.
• Neonatal flow sensor
• Expiratory flow sensor
• Exhalation valve assembly includes:
— Diaphragm
— O-ring
— Water trap
• Aerogen Aeroneb Pro Nebulizer
— Filler cap
— Nebulizer
— T-adapter
• Auxiliary water trap (optional accessory)
Important Disinfection of components is achieved through the sterilization
process.
CAUTION Do not use abrasives, sharp tools, or any methods that

may damage the surface of the parts.
w Do not use automated washer disinfection method.
Neonatal flow sensor See Section 13 “Neonatal option” for cleaning and sterilization
instructions.
7-12 M1205553
Expiratory flow If the expiratory flow sensor is removed during use, the ventilator will
sensor alarm, volume and flow measurements will not be displayed, and flow
triggering will not be available until the sensor is replaced.
Disassembly 1. Remove the flow sensor by pulling it away from the ventilator
INSP EXP
AB.98.289
Cleaning
CAUTION Do not use compressed air or water jet to clean the

expiratory flow sensor.

minute. Gently agitate flow sensor if necessary to remove debris.
3. Thoroughly rinse component in cold water by completely
immersing in a large volume (2 gallons) of sterile or potable water
for a minimum of 1 minute.
4. Thoroughly rinse component in hot water by completely
visible.
M1205553 7-13
Sterilization 1. Place cleaned and disassembled components in a sterilization

pouch.
2. Sterilization of components may be performed using any of the
following three methods.
• Gravity autoclave components at 121° C for a minimum of 30
minutes with a 30 minute drying cycle.
• Prevacuum autoclave components at at 134° C for a
minimum of 3 minutes with a 16 minute drying cycle.
3. When storing parts do not remove the parts from the sterilization
pouch until required for use.
Reassembly 1. Replace flow sensor when dry. Flow sensor will click when it is
properly replaced.
2. Complete a system Checkout prior to use on the next patient.
7-14 M1205553
Exhalation valve
assembly
Disassembly 1. Remove the exhalation valve assembly from the ventilator by
pressing down on the latch and pulling the assembly away from
the ventilator.
INSP EXP
2. Remove the expiratory flow sensor from the exhalation valve

assembly and set aside or clean.
3
1
AB.98.270
1. Exhalation valve housing (side view)
2. Water trap
3. Diaphragm
3. Unscrew the water trap and empty.

• Ensure water trap o-ring is not misplaced.
4. Remove the diaphragm from the exhalation valve housing by
lifting the edge of the diaphragm away from the housing.
M1205553 7-15
Cleaning 1. Thoroughly rinse component by completely immersing in a large

minute.
visible.
Sterilization 1. Place disassembled components in a sterilization pouch.

• Prevacuum autoclave components at at 134° C for a minimum
of 3 minutes with a 16 minute drying cycle.
Reassembly 1. Reassemble the water trap and diaphragm on the exhalation

valve housing.
• Ensure the water trap o-ring is present when reassembling
the water trap.
2. Reassemble the dry exhalation valve housing and expiratory flow
sensor.
3. Install the exhalation valve assembly onto the ventilator.
7-16 M1205553
Aeroneb Pro nebulizer

Sterilize the nebulizer prior to the first use on a patient. Clean and
sterilize the nebulizer between patients.
WARNING Do not use any other cleaning, disinfection, or sterilization

methods other than those listed in this section.
CAUTION Do not use abrasive or sharp tools to clean the nebulizer

unit.
Cleaning unit
between uses for the
same patient
Disassembly 1. Remove the nebulizer unit from the T-adapter and firmly insert a
plug into the T-adapter.
2. Separate nebulizer and the cable.
CAUTION Do not autoclave or submerge the nebulizer cable.

3. Remove the filler cap from the nebulizer, and empty any excess
liquid.

minute.
visible.
M1205553 7-17
Disinfecting unit
between uses for the
same patient
Disassembly 1. Remove the nebulizer unit from the T-adapter and firmly insert a
plug into the T-adapter.
2. Separate the nebulizer and cable.
Cleaning 1. Remove the filler cap from the nebulizer and empty any excess
liquid.
2. Disinfect using the method for CIDEX, NU-CIDEX, or CIDEX
OPA. See CIDEX or CIDEX OPA disinfection methods.
CAUTION Refer to the product labeling for CIDEX, NU-CIDEX, and

CIDEX OPA for specific instructions regarding activation,
safe use, and disposal of these solutions. Disinfection
should not be used as an alternative to sterilization.
Sterilizing unit
between patients
Disassembly 1. Remove the nebulizer and the adapters from the ventilator circuit.
2. Disassemble the nebulizer unit and adapters into individual
components.
1
AB.98.268
1. Filler cap
2. Nebulizer
3. T-adapter
7-18 M1205553

3. Remove the filler cap from the nebulizer and empty any excess
liquid.

minute.
5. Dry in room air, allowing cavities to drain.Dry in room air, allowing
cavities to drain.
6. Check for cracks or damage, and replace any parts that show
any visible defects.
7. Place disassembled components in a sterilization pouch.
CAUTION Do not reassemble parts prior to autoclaving.
Sterilization 1. Sterilize the components.

• To Gravity sterilize, autoclave components at 134° C for a
minimum of 3 minutes with a 16 minute drying cycle.
• To Prevacuum sterilize, autoclave components at at 134° C
for a minimum of 3 minutes with a 16 minute drying cycle.
M1205553 7-19
Reassembly 1. Insert filler cap into the nebulizer.

2. Connect the nebulizer to the T-adapter by pushing the nebulizer
firmly onto the adapter.
AB.98.281
3. Connect the nebulizer and T-adapter into the inspiratory limb of
the breathing circuit before the patient wye.
AB.98.283
4. Complete a functional test of the nebulizer.
• Pour 1 to 5 ml of sterile water or normal saline into the
nebulizer unit.
• Connect the nebulizer to the ventilator using the nebulizer
cable.
• Select Nebulizer - Start.
• Verify that aerosol is visible.
• Select Nebulizer - Stop.
• Disconnect the nebulizer from the ventilator and store
properly.
7-20 M1205553
Water trap - ventilator mounted (optional)

Disassembly 1. Disconnect the water trap from the patient circuit.
2. Disassemble the water trap and discard any liquid.
AB.98.267
1. Water trap housing
2. Water trap

minute.
visible.
M1205553 7-21
Sterilization 1. Place disassembled components in a sterilization pouch.

Reassembly 1. Assemble the water trap and water trap housing.

7-22 M1205553
In this section Ventilation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Ventilating in Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Electrical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Pneumatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
M1205553 8-1
Ventilation theory
The system delivers controlled volume or pressure breath profiles in
response to clinician inputs. The ventilator is time cycled for
controlled breaths and flow cycled with a time cycle override, for
spontaneous breaths. The system will trigger on both pressure and
flow, and will respond to a positive inspiratory trigger condition within
eight ms. The system uses proportional flow control valves and an
active exhalation valve in order to provide ventilation delivery.
A controllable bias flow is maintained during ventilation delivery for
use in detecting and responding to the spontaneous breath activity of
the patient. The system incorporates monitoring of airway pressure,
FiO2, and exhaled volume monitoring that is independent of the
ventilation delivery system. The system also includes an integrated
nebulizer system employing electronic micropump technology for
delivery of inhaled drugs.
The system is a software controlled microprocessor based product
that receives clinical control inputs and displays information via a
graphical user interface display unit. The display unit communicates
in real time with two other system microprocessors that control
ventilation delivery and safety related ventilation monitoring. The
display unit also communicates with Datex-Ohmeda monitoring
modules in order to acquire and display additional monitoring
information such as CO2 and O2.
Ventilating in Backup mode

The system will function in a Backup mode. This mode is initiated if
the system detects insufficient ventilation occurring in spontaneous
breathing modes.
Backup ventilation uses the backup settings preset by the user. When
the system is operating under backup ventilation, an alarm sounds
and a pop-up window message will appear.
• Select Reset to reset the system to the previous mode and exit
Backup mode.
• Select Adopt, to exit Backup mode and retain the current Backup
mode settings.
8-2 M1205553
Ventilation modes
The system offers several different modes of ventilation. The
functionality, the Vent Setup menu selections, and a typical waveform
for each vent mode are presented. The values displayed in the
menus are the factory default settings and values. The facility or the
user may change these values. See “Ventilation operating
specifications” in Section 11 for information on the range of values for
each ventilation control. See “Setting definitions” in Chapter 1 and
“Ventilation operating specifications” in Chapter 11 for more
information on individual settings.
Setting families The modes of ventilation have specific set parameters. The Engström
provides the user with the flexibility to specify certain parameters that
are aligned with the user’s past experience. These include flow and
timing parameters.
Five setting families are available. The timing settings affect the
inspiration time of the breath. Depending on the facility’s
configuration, timing can be set to I:E, Tinsp, or Tpause, and Flow
control can be set to On or Off. Tpause can only be selected when
the Flow is set to On. See “Installation Mode,” in Section 10 for more
information about the Ventilator Settings menu.
The Timing and Flow selections in the Ventilator Settings menu will
determine which of these settings are available in the VCV, PCV,
PCV-VG, and SIMV-VC modes. The table shows the setting families.
All modes shown in the table require a respiratory rate setting. VCV,
PCV-VG, and SIMV-VC modes also require a tidal volume setting.
For example: if timing is set to I:E and flow is set to Off, setting family
2 is active. When in VCV mode, available settings that control the
timing and flow are I:E and Insp Pause.
Family 1 Family 2 Family 3 Family 4 Family 5

Timing I:E I:E Tinsp Tinsp Tpause
Flow On Off On Off On
Control
VCV I:E I:E Tinsp Tinsp Tpause

Flow Insp Pause Flow Insp Pause Flow
PCV I:E I:E Tinsp Tinsp Tinsp
PCV-VG I:E I:E Tinsp Tinsp Tinsp
SIMV-VC Tinsp Tinsp Tinsp Tinsp Tpause

Flow Insp Pause Flow Insp Pause Flow
The BiLevel selection in the Ventilator Settings menu will determine

which Timing settings are available in BiLevel.
• I:E will display I:E and Rate
• Tinsp will display Tinsp and Rate
• Thigh will display Thigh and Tlow.
M1205553 8-3
Volume controlled In VCV, a set amount of volume is delivered during each mandatory
ventilation (VCV) breath. The volume is delivered using a constant flow over a specified
amount of time. The amount of pressure required to deliver the tidal
volume will vary according to the compliance and resistance of the
patient’s lungs and thorax.
In VCV, the gas flow to the patient is kept constant during inspiration
as long as the airway pressure is below the Plimit setting. Once the
Plimit setting has been reached, the flow is reduced to maintain the
Plimit level. During the expiratory phase, spontaneous breaths can be
drawn from the set PEEP level.
Assist control is available in VCV, PCV, and PCV-VG modes.
Activate assist control through the Vent Preferences menu.
VCV
Exit
FiO2 50
TV 500
Rate 10
I:E* 1:2
PEEP Off
Pmax 20
Plimit 100
Trigger 2
Bias Flow 3
Insp Pause* 0
Rise Time 100
* This setting is dependent on the Timing and Flow selections made in the
Ventilator Settings menu.
8-4 M1205553
AB.98.036
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
3. Insp Pause
4. Texp
5. PEEP
6. Flow waveform
7. TV
Figure 8-1 • VCV waveforms
M1205553 8-5
Pressure controlled In PCV, a set pressure level is delivered during each mandatory
ventilation (PCV) breath. The pressure is delivered using a decelerating flow and the
breath is held for a set amount of time. The amount of volume
provided will vary according to the compliance of the patient’s lungs.
During the inspiratory phase, spontaneous breaths can be drawn
from the set inspired pressure level. During the expiratory phase,
spontaneous breaths can be drawn from the set PEEP level.
Assist control is available in VCV, PCV, and PCV-VG modes.
PCV
Exit
FiO2 50
Pinsp 10
Rate 10
I:E* 1:2
PEEP Off
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Bias Flow 3
Rise Time 100
* This setting is dependent on the Timing selection made in the
Ventilator Settings menu.
8-6 M1205553
AB.98.037
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
3. Texp
4. Pinsp
5. PEEP
6. Flow waveform
Figure 8-2 • PCV waveforms
M1205553 8-7
Pressure controlled In PCV-VG, a tidal volume is set and the ventilator delivers that
ventilation - volume volume using a decelerating flow and a constant pressure. The
ventilator will adjust the inspiratory pressure needed to deliver the set
guaranteed (PCV-VG) tidal volume breath-by-breath so that the lowest pressure is used.
The pressure range that the ventilator will use is between the PEEP +
2 cmH2O level on the low end and 5 cmH2O below Pmax on the high
end. The inspiratory pressure change between breaths is a maximum
of ±3 cmH2O. If a high airway pressure alarm is active due to the
current breath, the next breath’s pressure target will be 0.5 cmH2O
less than the current breath’s pressure target.
This mode will deliver breaths with the efficiency of pressure
controlled ventilation, yet still compensate for changes in the patient’s
lung compliance. PCV-VG begins by delivering volume controlled
breaths for 10 seconds or two breath periods, whichever is longer.
The patient’s compliance is determined from this period of volume
controlled ventilation and the inspiratory pressure level is then
established for the next PCV-VG breath.
PCV-VG
Exit
FiO2 50
TV 500
Rate 10
I:E* 1:2
PEEP Off
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Bias Flow 3
Rise Time 100
* This setting is dependent on the Timing selection made in the Ventilator
Settings menu.
8-8 M1205553
AB.98.034
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
3. Texp
4. Variable pressure to deliver desired TV
5. PEEP
6. Flow waveform
7. TV
Figure 8-3 • PCV-VG waveforms
M1205553 8-9
Synchronized In SIMV-VC, a set number of volume control breaths are delivered to

intermittent the patient each minute. The patient can breathe spontaneously
between mandatory breaths. Pressure support can be used to
mandatory support the spontaneous breaths.
ventilation - volume
A portion of the exhalation phase is defined as the trigger window. If a
controlled (SIMV-VC) spontaneous breath is detected in this window, a new volume
controlled breath is initiated. If a spontaneous breath is detected
outside of this window, support for this breath is provided according to
the set pressure support. The remainder of the trigger window is
added to the next non-triggered phase.
The inspiratory phase of supported breaths will end if the set End
Flow is reached, if the airway pressure exceeds (PEEP + Psupp + 2.5
cmH2O), or if the max Tinsp is reached. Supported breaths have a
maximum inspiratory time of 4 seconds for adults, 1.5 seconds for
pediatrics, and 0.8 seconds for neonates.
Ventilation modes to which backup ventilation apply are established
by facility defaults. See “Installation Mode,” section 10.
If selected to be active in SIMV-VC, backup ventilation will be initiated
if the Apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute ventilation
decreases to below 50% of the set low MVexp alarm. Backup settings
may be changed for each patient.
SIMV-VC
Exit Insp Pause*
FiO2 50 Rise Time 100
TV 500 PSV Rise Time 50
Rate 10 End Flow 25
Tinsp 1.7
PEEP Off
Psupp 5
Plimit 100
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Trig Window 25
Bias Flow 3
* This setting is dependent on the Flow selection made in the Ventilator
Settings menu.
8-10 M1205553
AB.98.035
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
3. Insp Pause
4. Spontaneous breathing period
5. Trig Window
6. Pressure supported breath
7. Flow waveform
8. TV
Figure 8-4 • SIMV-VC waveforms
M1205553 8-11
Synchronized In SIMV-PC, a set number of pressure control breaths are delivered

intermittent to the patient each minute. The patient can breathe spontaneously
between mandatory breaths. Pressure support can be used to
mandatory support the spontaneous breaths.
ventilation - pressure
controlled (SIMV-PC) spontaneous breath is detected in this window, a new pressure
controlled breath is initiated. If a spontaneous breath is detected
outside of this window, support for this breath is provided according to
the set pressure support. The remainder of the trigger window is
added to the next non-triggered phase.
If selected to be active in SIMV-PC, backup ventilation will be initiated
if the Apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute ventilation
SIMV-PC
Exit PSV Rise Time 0
FiO2 50 End Flow 25
Pinsp 10
Rate 10
Tinsp 1.7
PEEP Off
Psupp 5
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Trig Window 25
Bias Flow 3
Rise Time 100
8-12 M1205553
AB.98.038
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
4. Trig Window
5. Pressure supported breath
6. Pinsp
7. Flow waveform
Figure 8-5 • SIMV-PC waveforms
M1205553 8-13
BiLevel airway In BiLevel, the ventilator switches between two pressure levels at set
pressure ventilation times. The patient can breathe spontaneously while at either of the
pressure levels.
(BiLevel)
The ventilator synchronizes spontaneous breathing with changes in
pressure level. The system has a set trigger window of 80% or 4
seconds whichever is less. If a spontaneous breath is detected within
this window, the breath is delivered by an increase to Pinsp + Plow,
or Phigh. If a spontaneous breath is detected outside the window, a
PSV breath is delivered.
Note The level of inspiratory pressure provided during a spontaneous
breath taken within the high pressure period (Thigh) will be equal to
the pressure difference between Psupp and Phigh if Psupp is greater
than Phigh. If Phigh is greater than Psupp then no additional support
will be provided. See Figure 8.6.
If the patient triggers a spontaneous breath just before the end of
Thigh, the system will continue to deliver at Phigh (or Psupp if Psupp
is more than Phigh) until the end flow is detected or PSV times out.
Then, the system will transition to Plow.
Flow is reached, if the airway pressure exceeds (Plow + Psupp + 2.5
If selected to be active in BiLevel, backup ventilation will be initiated if
the Apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute ventilation
BiLevel
Exit End Flow 25
FiO2 50
Phigh 10
Plow Off
Tinsp* 1.7
Rate* 10
Psupp 5
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Bias Flow 3
Rise Time 100
PSV Rise Time 50
*This setting is dependent on the BiLevel selection made in the Ventilator

Settings menu.
8-14 M1205553
AB.98.151
1. Paw waveform
2. High pressure period (Thigh)
3. Low pressure period (Tlow)
4. Plow + Psupp
5. Plow
6. Flow waveform
Figure 8-6 • BiLevel waveforms
M1205553 8-15
Constant positive This mode offers the features from both CPAP and PSV modes and
airway pressure/ is used on spontaneously breathing patients. In CPAP, a pressure
above ambient pressure is maintained on the patient’s airway.
pressure
support ventilation In PSV, the ventilator provides a set pressure level on top of the
CPAP level during the inspiratory phase of the patient’s breath. The
(CPAP/PSV) patient determines their own rate, tidal volume, and inspiratory timing.
If selected to be active in CPAP/PSV, backup ventilation will be
initiated if the Apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute
ventilation decreases to below 50% of the set low MVexp alarm.
Backup settings may be changed for each patient.
Rate, Pinsp, and Tinsp can be added to the CPAP/PSV menu when
CPAP Rate is turned On by the Super User using the Ventilator
Settings menu. These settings apply mechanical breaths during
CPAP/PSV ventilation.
When Rate is set in CPAP, the ventilator will deliver backup breaths
to the patient if the patient fails to breathe spontaneously over two
breath periods. Backup breaths will be PCV breaths at the set Pinsp,
Tinsp, and Rate settings.
See “Installation Mode,” Section 10 before making menu changes.
CPAP/PSV
Exit
FiO2 50
PEEP Off
Psupp 5
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Bias Flow 3
PSV Rise Time 50
End Flow 25
Rate 10
Pinsp 10
Tinsp 1.7
8-16 M1205553
AB.98.033
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
3. Texp
4. Psupp
5. PEEP
6. Flow waveform
Figure 8-7 • CPAP/PSV waveforms
M1205553 8-17
Synchronized This is an optional mode on the Engström Carestation.

intermittent In SIMV-PCVG, a set number of pressure control breaths with a
mandatory guaranteed volume are delivered to the patient each minute. The
ventilation - pressure patient can breathe spontaneously between mandatory breaths.
Pressure support can be used to support the spontaneous breaths.
controlled volume
The mandatory breaths will deliver the set tidal volume using a
guaranteed
decelerating flow and a constant pressure. The ventilator will adjust
(SIMV-PCVG) the inspiratory pressure needed to deliver the set tidal volume breath-
by-breath so that the lowest pressure is used. The pressure range
that the ventilator will use is between the PEEP + 2 cmH2O level on
the low end and 5 cmH2O below Pmax on the high end. The
inspiratory pressure change between breaths is a maximum of +/- 3
cmH2O. If a high airway pressure alarm is active due to the current
breath, the next breath’s pressure target will be 0.5 cmH2O less than
the current breath’s pressure target.
SIMV-PCVG begins by delivering volume controlled breaths for 10
seconds or two breath periods, whichever is longer. The patient’s
compliance is determined from this period of volume controlled
ventilation and the inspiratory pressure level is then established for
the next PCVG breath. The remaining mandatory breaths will be
pressure controlled with a guaranteed volume.
spontaneous breath is detected in this window, a new mandatory
PCVG breath is initiated. If a spontaneous breath is detected outside
of this window, support for this breath is provided according to the set
pressure support. The remainder of the trigger window is added to the
next non-triggering phase.
If selected to be active in SIMV-PCVG, backup ventilation will be
initiated if the apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute
ventilation decreases below 50% of the set low MVexp alarm limit.
8-18 M1205553
SIMV-PCVG
FiO2 50 End Flow 25
TV 500
Rate 10
Tinsp 1.7
PEEP Off
Psupp 5
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Trig Window 25
Bias Flow 3
Rise Time 100
AB.98.153
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
4. Trig Window
6. PEEP
7. Flow waveform
8. TV
Figure 8-8 • SIMV-PCVG waveforms
M1205553 8-19
BiLevel airway This is an optional mode on the Engström Carestation.

pressure ventilation - BiLevel-VG combines the "open valve" technology of BiLevel with the
volume guaranteed benefits of volume guarantee. The base mode of BiLevel ventilation is
(BiLevel-VG) united with the volume guarantee system of Pressure Controlled
Volume Guaranteed that ensures the set tidal volume is delivered
during the high-pressure level. The volume guarantee automatically
sets the inspiratory pressure to the lowest possible level to provide
the set tidal volume. This inspiratory pressure level becomes the
Phigh level of the BiLevel breath.
The volume guarantee is determined by the set tidal volume that
results from the difference between the PEEP level and the
inspiratory pressure level. The pressure range that the ventilator will
use is between PEEP + 2 cmH2O on the low end and 5 cmH2O below
Pmax on the high end. The inspiratory pressure change between
breaths is a maximum of +/- 3 cmH2O. If a high airway pressure alarm
is active due to the current breath, the next breath’s pressure target
will be 0.5 cmH2O less than the current breath’s pressure target.
BiLevel-VG begins by delivering volume controlled breaths for 10
seconds or two breath periods, whichever is longer. The patient’s
compliance is determined from this period of volume controlled
ventilation and the inspiratory pressure level is then established for
the next BiLevel breath. The remaining mandatory breaths will be
pressure controlled with a guaranteed volume.
spontaneous breath is detected in this window, a new mandatory
BiLevel breath is initiated. If a spontaneous breath is detected outside
of this window, support for this breath is provided according to the set
pressure support level. The remainder of the trigger window is added
to the next non-triggering phase.
If selected to be active in BiLevel-VG, backup ventilation will be
initiated if the Apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute
ventilation decreases below 50% of the set low MVexp alarm limit.
8-20 M1205553
BiLevel-VG
FiO2 50 End Flow 25
TV 500
Rate 10
Tinsp 2.0
PEEP Off
Psupp 5
Pmax 30
Trigger 2
Trig Window 25
Bias Flow 3
Rise Time 100
AB.98.152
1. Paw waveform
2. Tinsp
5. PEEP
6. Flow waveform
7. TV
Figure 8-9 • BiLevel-VG waveforms
M1205553 8-21
Electrical operation
The system contains four major processor control boards: the Display
Unit (DU - Item 7), the Ventilator Control Board (VCB - Item 19), the
Ventilation Monitoring Board (VMB - Item 37), and the Power
Management Board (PMB - Item 33). Two other analog boards, the
Motherboard (Item 12) and the Monitoring Module Power Supply
Board (Item 11), complete the electronic architecture.
AB.98.335
8-22 M1205553
1. Display compartment 25. O2 flow and temperature sensor

2. Monitoring module compartment 26. Total flow and temperature sensor
3. Ventilator chassis 27. Inspiratory pressure sensor and valve
4. LCD display 28. Auxiliary pressure sensor and valve
5. ComWheel 29. Power panel connectors
6. Speaker 30. System switch
7. Display unit CPU 31. AC power cord
8. Display unit interface board 32. Mains power supply
9. Display unit communication board 33. Power management board (PMB)
10. Module bays 34. Ventilator engine fan
11. Module interface board 35. Power module fan
12. Motherboard 36. Internal batteries
13. Display unit port 37. Ventilation monitoring board (VMB)
14. External serial input/output port 38. Inspiratory effort valve
15. RS-422 port 39. Relief valve
16. RS-422 port 40. High air pressure sensor
17. Module bus port 41. High O2 pressure sensor
18. Patient side monitor port 42. Expiratory flow sensor board
19. Ventilator control board (VCB) 43. Expiratory flow interface board
20. Electronic micropump nebulizer board 44. Expiratory flow sensor
21. Air flow valve 45. O2 concentration sensor
22. O2 flow valve 46. Expiratory pressure sensor and valve
23. Exhalation valve
24. Air flow and temperature sensor
Figure 8-10 • Electrical block diagram
Display Unit (DU) The DU contains a CPU board and three daughter boards. The CPU
board provides power and signals for operating the main audio
speaker and the display. One daughter board, the DU connector
board, provides an interface between the DU’s CPU and the
remainder of the system. The second daughter board provides
hardware connector interfaces for the Ethernet, USB and serial ports.
The third daughter board provides touch sensing capability as well as
variable speed fan control for reduced audible noise and internal
cooling.
The DU communicates with the remainder of the system via the
motherboard using five digital channels. Setting and alarm
annunciation information are directly relayed to the VMB and VCB
from the DU. The display is a 31 cm active matrix LCD with 6 bits per
color.
In the event of a display unit communications failure, the system will
continue to ventilate at the current settings.
M1205553 8-23
Ventilator Control The VCB collects information from all of the system sensors and
Board (VCB) controls all the actuators necessary to effect ventilation delivery. The
VCB subsequently computes and supplies all ventilation sensor
monitoring data for the display on the DU. If there are alarms to be
generated based on this monitoring data, the VCB notifies the DU to
post the appropriate alarm message and audio sequence and
observes the DU’s response to ensure that the alarm was adequately
presented.
The VCB receives expiratory flow, expiratory pressure, and O2 sensor
data from the VMB. The VCB contains actuator drive circuits for the
air and oxygen inspiratory valves and the expiratory valve. The VCB
also contains digital control signals for activating the inspiratory effort
and relief valves.
Ventilation The VMB performs as an independent monitoring system that

Monitoring Board provides computational and oversight redundancy to the DU and
VCB. The VMB acquires sensor data relating to the expiratory airway
(VMB) pressure, delivered O2 percentage, and exhaled minute and tidal
volumes. It also monitors the air and oxygen supply pressures.
A relief valve actuator is also controlled by the VMB. This allows for a
unilateral release of pressure in the breathing circuit.
The VMB communicates directly with the DU. A separate link
transmits sensor data to the VCB.
Power Management The PMB determines the source of power and controls the charging
Board (PMB) operation of the internal battery.
The PMB directly communicates with the DU concerning the charge
status of the internal battery as well as the unit shutdown sequence.
Motherboard The motherboard provides connectivity for the VCB, VMB, and PMB
assemblies. Analog circuits on the board limit the current for external
peripheral connections to ensure that the primary ventilation and
monitoring functions are not compromised by excessive power draw.
Monitoring Module External monitoring module bays support the use of Datex-Ohmeda
Power Supply Board M-series or E-series modules. This board is located within the
housing of the module bay and regulates power to usable levels.
8-24 M1205553
Pneumatic operation
H
P P
T H
H
Air P
H
O2
P T H
O2
AB.98.226
1. Compressor 16. Oxygen sensor
2. Pipeline source 17. Inspiratory pressure transducer
3. Filter 18. Inspiratory pressure zeroing valve
4. Supply pressure transducer 19. Neonatal flow sensor (optional)
5. Check valve 20. Inspiratory effort valve
6. Pressure regulator 21. Free breathing check valve
7. Test port with plug 22. Relief valve
8. Absolute pressure 23. Nebulizer
9. Inspiratory flow sensor 24. Purge flow resistor
10. Inspiratory flow valve 25. Exhalation valve actuator
11. Auxiliary pressure purge valve 26. Check valve
12. Auxiliary pressure transducer 27. Expiratory flow sensor
13. Relief valve 28. Purge flow resistor
14. Auxiliary pressure port 29. Expiratory pressure zeroing valve
15. Total flow sensor 30. Expiratory pressure transducer
Figure 8-11 • Pneumatic schematic
M1205553 8-25
The supply of ventilator pneumatic power is drawn from compressed

oxygen and air sources. Two separate inspiratory channels (air and
O2) are incorporated in the system in order to provide dynamic
mixture control of the O2 percentage. The air supply side may include
an optional compressor unit for applications where compressed air is
not available or compressed gases have been lost.
Inspiratory Compressed gas enters the system through a coupling that is

particular to the air or O2 gas localization requirements. The gas is
filtered as it enters the ventilator’s pneumatic engine manifold. A
supply pressure transducer is tapped at the exhaust of the filter to
identify the adequacy of the supply pressure within the allowable
range. Failures of supply gas, coupling hoses, or occluded filters, are
identified using the supply pressure transducer.
Check valves prevent any backflow from the system that would
possibly contaminate the supply gas lines. The pressure regulators
ensure a constant pressure supply to the inspiratory flow valves. The
inspiratory flow sensors are used during operation of the system to
measure the volume of gas dispensed from the air and O2 channels
during inspiration. Adjustments as to the relative proportion of volume
to dispense from each channel are made using this data in order to
precisely control the percentage of O2 being delivered to the patient.
Each inspiratory flow valve is capable of metering flows from
approximately 0.05 l/min to 160 l/min. The valve is a proportional
solenoid, normally closed type, that is powered by a current feedback
loop.
The total flow sensor is used to measure the combined inspiratory
flow being dispensed in the system. Using the known mixture
composition, mass flow data from the sensor is converted to
delivered volumetric flow towards the patient.
During normal operation, the inspiratory effort maneuver valve is
open, allowing the free breathing check valve to admit flow if the
patient draws a significant amount of inspiratory pressure. The free
breathing valve allows the patient to spontaneously breathe in the
event of a ventilation delivery failure. During an inspiratory effort
procedure, the inspiratory effort maneuver valve closes, locking out
the free breathing valve from the patient circuit.
8-26 M1205553
The O2 sensor operates using the paramagnetic principle of oxygen.

The sensor is used to monitor the O2 mixture being produced by the
air and O2 inspiratory channels. The displayed FiO2 value is adjusted
by a ratio of the barometric pressure and a 1.3 second moving
average of the cyclic pressures obtained by the inspiratory pressure
transducer. The sensor uses non-depleting technology.
The relief valve is capable of venting the inspiratory delivery side of
the system at full flow rate. The valve is normally closed and would be
powered open by either of the two control processors in the event that
an overpressure condition is detected. The relief valve will also open
mechanically at 110 cmH2O. The inspiratory airway pressure
transducer serves as one of the two airway pressure devices. All
pressure transducers use silicon piezoresistive technology.
Expiratory A solenoid powered exhalation valve controls exhaust from the

breathing circuit. The solenoid is proportional in nature, allowing the
valve to be used to actively adjust and control the exhalation sealing
pressure.
The expiratory pressure transducer is continuously purged with clean,
dry air in order to ensure that water plugs will not occlude the tap.
This continuous flow of air is established off of the regulated air
supply using a fixed purge flow pneumatic resistor. The expiratory
pressure transducer uses silicon piezoresistive technology, and
operates between -20 and 120 cmH2O.
The expiratory flow transducer operates using hot wire anemometry
principles whereby a wire having a large temperature to electrical
resistance relationship, is placed in the stream of flow. At the output
of the flow sensor is a flapper type check valve that prevents gas from
being drawn in through the expiratory valve and minimizes patient
rebreathing in the event of a ventilator failure.
The inspiratory flow sensors, total flow sensor and expiratory flow
sensors use heat transfer technology and operate between
0 and 160 l/min.
Hazard protection Potential software hazards are detected and prevented through the
identification of unsafe patient conditions relative to O2 concentration,
airway pressure, apnea, and low minute volume.
Checks have been put in place for inspired O2, airway pressure,
apnea, and low minute volume alarms. Inspired O2 is sensed by the
air and oxygen flow sensors and verified by the paramagnetic O2
sensor. Airway pressure is sensed and verified by the inspiratory and
expiratory pressure sensors. Apnea and low minute volume are
sensed by the expiratory flow sensor or neonatal flow sensor
(optional) and verified by the air and oxygen flow sensors.
M1205553 8-27
8-28 M1205553
9 Parts
This section lists user-replaceable parts only. For other components,

refer to the latest revision of the Engström Carestation Technical
Reference manual.
In this section Exhalation valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

AC power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
System accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
System parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Airway module parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
EVair 03 compressor parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Shelf Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
M1205553 9-1
Exhalation valve assembly
2 3
4
1
AB.98.030
9
Item Description Stock Number

Exhalation valve assembly (without flow 1505-8568-000
transducer)
1 Diaphragm 1505-3224-000
2 Seal 1505-3223-000
3 Housing 1505-3222-000
4 Flow transducer (includes check valve and 1505-3231-000
screen)
5 O-ring 1503-3056-000
6 Plunger 1505-3245-000
7 Spring 1505-3013-000
8 O-ring 1505-3009-000
9 Water trap 1505-3244-000
The expiratory flow sensor has a 90 day warranty.
9-2 M1205553
9 Parts
Exhalation valve
heater
1 2

1 Exhalation valve heater M1200693
2 Cable (order separately) M1188723
M1205553 9-3
AC power cords
1 2
3
AB.98.008
AB.98.052
AB.98.049
1 1 1

1 Power Cord
• AS 3112, 220-240 Vac 1500-3561-000
• BS 1363, 220-240 Vac 1500-3283-000
• BS 546, 220-240 Vac 1505-3817-000
• CEE 7/7, 220 Vac 1500-3291-000
• GB2099, 220-240 Vac M1062785
• NBR14136, 100-120 Vac, 220-240 Vac, 4.0 mm M1217469
• NEMA 5-15, 100-120 Vac 1505-3816-000
• SEV 1011, 220-240 Vac 1500-3292-000
2 Power Cord Jumper, 1.0 meters 1505-3844-000
3 Power Cord Jumper, 0.5 meters 1505-3843-000
5 6
AB.98p078

4 Retainer, Outlet Power Cord Jumper 1505-3041-000
5 Retainer, Inlet Power Cord 1505-3033-000
6 Screw, M3x8 PAN HD Sems 0140-6219-130
9-4 M1205553
9 Parts
System accessories
Description Stock Number
Adapter (Neo Flow Sensor to CO2 mainstream M1109409
sensor), 15 mm male/female
Breathing circuit arm 1505-3801-000
Breathing circuit, Adult (20) M1012145
Breathing circuit, Pediatric (20) M1012152
Expiratory water trap hose M1010719
Expiratory water trap kit M1003463
Gas cylinder holder 6600-0422-800
Intratracheal pressure catheter (10) M1045564
Nebulizer cable 1505-5602-000
Nebulizer filler cap AG-AP1030
Nebulizer head with filler cap* AG-AP1000
Nebulizer T-adapter with silicone plug, adult (5) AG-AP1010
Nebulizer replacement kit, adult (includes 2 AG-AP1100
nebulizer heads with filler caps and 2 adult
tees)
Nebulizer T-adapter with silicone plug, pediatric AG-AP-1020
(5)
Nebulizer T-adapter, pediatric (includes AG-AP1015
neonate adapter kit) (5)
Nebulizer replacement kit, pediatric (includes 2 AG-AP1200
nebulizer heads with filler caps and 2 pediatric
tees)
Nebulizer T-adapter, neonatal with silicone plug AG-AP1035
12mm/12mm (5)
Nebulizer - Neonate adapter kit (5) AG-AP1025
Nebulizer, silicone plug AG-AP1005
*Aerogen, Inc. recommends replacing the nebulizer head once a

year.
M1205553 9-5
System parts
1 (2)
4
3
6
AB.98.055
AB.98.183
1 Display filter 897010
2 Display filter holder 896089
3 Fan filter, ventilator engine 1505-3029-000
4 Filter element 1505-3060-000
5 O-ring, filter bowl 1503-3034-000
6 Filter bowl w/ o ring 1505-3062-000
Neonatal flow sensor
1 MD.24.100
MD24.099

1 Neonatal flow sensor 1505-3272-000
2 Neonatal flow sensor cable 1505-5604-000
The neonatal flow sensor has a 90 day warranty.
9-6 M1205553
9 Parts
Airway module parts and accessories

Description Stock Number
D-fend water trap container (5) 876107
D-fend+ water trap (10) 881319
Disposable CO2 sampling line, 2m (10) 733162
Disposable D-lite sensor (50) 733950
Disposable D-lite+ sensor (50) 896952
Disposable Pedi-lite+ sensor (50) 8001948
Disposable straight t-adapter (10) 73385
Disposable straight t-adapter (100) 733856
Reusable D-lite sensor 733910
Reusable Pedi-lite sensor 73393
Spirometry tube, 2m (5) 890031
EVair 03 compressor parts
AB.98.002
AB.98p077

1 Drain Bottle Kit 5612316
2 Filter, air inlet 6985795
3 Foam, Vibration Damper 1505-3829
M1205553 9-7
Shelf Mount
2
4
3

1 Shelf Mount Cover 1 M1137533
2 Shelf Mount
Shelf Mount kit M1081203
3 Nut, M6 Keps 4 0144-3717-330
4 Flat Washer, 1/4 inch A-4 4 0144-1014-168
5 Screw, M6x35 SKT HD Cap 4 0144-2131-912
6 Screw, M4x8 Pan (Philips) 4 9211-0440-083
9-8 M1205553
In this section Install/Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
M1205553 10-1
Install/Service menu
WARNING Do not enter the Install/Service menu when a patient is

connected to the ventilator. Ventilation will cease, and the
ventilator must be powered down in order to resume
Therapy.
CAUTION Changes made in the Installation mode will affect the

system configuration. All changes made are permanent
and preserved until changed again.
There are several settings which may be changed in the Installation
mode. These changes should only be made by the person (Super
User) responsible for the configuration of the ventilator.
Important The Engström must be turned off in order to exit the Install/Service
menu.
The password for entering the Install/Service menu is provided during
training.
Install/Service
Trends Setup
Display Settings
Ventilator Settings
Parameter Settings
Defaults
Data Transfer Settings
Calibration
Service
Exit
10-2 M1205553
Menus
The following is a list of the menu selections available.
Not all menu items are available and may depend on the system
configuration. Inactive menu items are grayed out and are not
selectable.
Menu selections shown below are the factory default values for adult
or pediatric patient types. The options are listed to the right of the
menu shown. Units selected must conform to local requirements.
Trends
Trends Setup
Default Trend Graph Meas, Graph, Set
Graphical Trends
Previous Menu
Graphical Trends
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
Previous Menu
M1205553 10-3
Page 1
Field 1 rr+co2 *Off, rr+co2 (Rate), Pres, Pmean, PEEP, MVexp, Spont,
Field 2 MVexp Mech Compl, Leak, Spiro, Paux, VO2, vo2/m2, VO2/kg, EE/
RQ
Field 3 Compl
Previous Menu
Page 2
Field 1 Pres *Off, rr+co2 (Rate), Pres, Pmean, PEEP, MVexp, Spont,
Field 2 Pmean Mech, Compl, Leak, Spiro, Paux, VO2, vo2/m2, VO2/kg,
EE/RQ
Field 3 PEEP
Previous Menu
Page 3
Field 1 Spont *Off, rr+co2 (Rate), Pres, Pmean, PEEP, MVexp, Spont,
Field 2 Mech Mech, Compl, Leak, Spiro, Paux, VO2, vo2/m2, VO2/kg,
EE/RQ
Field 3 Leak
Previous Menu
* The Field 1, Field 2, and Field 3 selections are the same for all fields.
10-4 M1205553
Page 4
Field 1 Spiro *Off, rr+co2 (Rate), Pres, Pmean, PEEP, MVexp,
Field 2 Paux Spont, Mech, Compl, Leak, Spiro, Paux, VO2, vo2/
m2, VO2/kg, EE/RQ
Field 3 EE/RQ
Previous Menu
Page 5
Field 1 VO2 *Off, rr+co2 (Rate), Pres, Pmean, PEEP, MVexp,
Field 2 vo2/m2 Spont, Mech, Compl, Leak, Spiro, Paux, VO2, vo2/
m2, VO2/kg, EE/RQ
Field 3 VO2/kg
Previous Menu
* The Field 1, Field 2, and Field 3 selections are the same for all fields.
M1205553 10-5
Display Settings
Display Settings
Colors
Units
Show Alarm Limits Yes* Yes or No
Time and Date
Layout Selection Full Full or Basic
Favorites
Touchscreen On On or Off
Previous Menu
* Selecting Yes for Show Alarm Limits will display the alarm limits
next to the measured values on the normal screen.
Colors
Paw Yellow Yellow, White, Green, Red, or Blue
Flow Green Yellow, White, Green, Red, or Blue
O2 White Yellow, White, Green, Red, or Blue
CO2 White Yellow, White, Green, Red, or Blue
Volume White Yellow, White, Green, Red, or Blue
Paux White Yellow, White, Green, Red, or Blue
Previous Menu
10-6 M1205553
Units
Paw cmH2O kPa, cmH2O, mbar
Flow l/min l/min or l/s
CO2 % %, kPa, mmHg
Height cm cm or in
Weight kg kg or lb
Energy Expenditure kcal/d kcal/d or kJ/d
Altitude m m or ft
Gas Supply Pressure kPa psi, kPa, or bar
Blood Gases kPa kPa or mmHg
Hb g/l g/l, g/dl, or mmol/l
Exit
Time and Date

Hour 12a 12a to 12p or 0 to 23
Minutes 0 0 to 59
Zero Seconds
Day 1 1 to 31
Month Jan Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep,
Oct, Nov, Dec
Year 2005 2003 to 2070
Clock Format 24 h 12h or 24h
Previous Menu
M1205553 10-7
Changing the Favorites The Favorites Bar is preset with seven factory default functions and
Bar factory defaults procedures: Manual Breath, SBT, Lung Mechanics, Vent
Preferences, Backup Mode, Alarm History, and Favorites Setup.
These defaults may be changed to configure the Favorites Bar to the
user’s or facility’s preference.
To change or view the Favorites defaults the system must be in
Standby.
2. Select Install/Service and enter the password.
3. Select Display Settings - Favorites.
The Favorites Factory Settings menu displays with the highlight on
the Scroll Settings menu item.
• Select Scroll Settings to view either the factory default
settings or the facility default and current settings.
• Select Bar Default On or Off to display the Favorites Bar.
• Select Facility to view the facility default and current settings.
• Select Factory to view the factory default settings.
• Select Save Current to save the current settings.
• Select Factory Reset Yes or No to return the Favorites Bar
to factory set defaults.
4. Select Previous Menu.
5. Turn the ventilator off.
• New settings are displayed after power up.
Favorites
Scroll Settings
Bar Default On On, Off
View:
Facility
Factory
Save Current No No, Yes
Factory Reset No No, Yes
Previous Menu
10-8 M1205553
Turning the Touchscreen Touchscreen is enabled when the Touchscreen hardware is detected
On or Off at startup and the touchscreen is set to On.
To turn the touchscreen On or Off:
3. Select Display Settings - Touchscreen.
4. Select On or Off and confirm the selection.
Note If the Touchscreen is turned Off, the Favorites Bar will no longer be
accessible or displayed.
M1205553 10-9
Ventilator settings Use the Ventilator Settings menu to set facility defaults.
menu
Ventilator Settings
Timing I:E I:E, Tinsp, Tpause
Flow Off On or Off
BiLevel Timing Tinsp I:E, Tinsp, Thigh
BiLevel High Pressure Phigh Phigh or Pinsp
CPAP Rate Off On or Off
Modes with Backup
Mode Availability All All, Selected
Selected Modes
Neonatal Increase O2 25 5-75, increments of 5
Previous Menu
Timing Select I:E, Tinsp, or Tpause. (Tpause is only available when Flow is
set to On.)
• Select I:E setting to display in VCV, PCV, PCV-VG ventilation
modes and Tinsp setting to display in SIMV-VC and SIMV-PC
ventilation modes.
• Select Tinsp setting to display in all ventilation modes.
• Select Tpause setting to display in volume modes and Tinsp
setting to display in pressure modes.
Flow Select On to display Flow as a ventilator setting in VCV and SIMV-VC

ventilation modes. (Tpause Timing is available when Flow is set to
On.)
Select Off to display Insp Pause as a ventilator setting in VCV and
SIMV-VC ventilation modes.
BiLevel Timing Select I:E to use the I:E and Rate settings, select Tinsp to use the
Tinsp and Rate settings, or select Thigh to use the Thigh and Tlow
settings for the BiLevel ventilation mode.
BiLevel High Pressure Select Phigh or Pinsp to display in BiLevel high pressure.
• If Phigh is selected, the BiLevel ventilation mode will use Phigh
as the High Pressure setting and the upper pressure level (Ptot)
will display as Phigh.
• If Pinsp is selected, the BiLevel ventilation mode will use Pinsp as
the High Pressure setting and the upper pressure level (Ptot) will
display as the sum of Pinsp and Plow.
CPAP Rate Select On to display Rate, Pinsp, and Tinsp settings in the Vent
Setup and SBT menus for the CPAP/PSV ventilation mode.
10-10 M1205553
Modes with Backup Allows user to select modes that will allow backup ventilation such as:
SIMV-VC, SIMV-PC, BiLevel, CPAP/PSV, SIMV-PCVG*, and
VG-PS**.
WARNING The settings in the Modes with Backup menu determine

which modes will have backup ventilation when
insufficient spontaneous breathing is detected. Before
deactivating backup ventilation for a specific mode,
ensure that all users at the facility have been trained and
notified of these settings.
Modes with Backup

SIMV-VC Yes Yes or No
SIMV-PC Yes Yes or No
BiLevel Yes Yes or No
CPAP/PSV Yes Yes or No
SIMV-PCVG* Yes Yes or No
VG-PS** Yes Yes or No
Previous Menu
**VG-PS mode will display in this location if Neonatal Option is installed.
M1205553 10-11
Mode Availability Select All to use all ventilation modes or Selected to use a
customized list of ventilation modes at power up.
Selected Modes The Selected Modes menu can be used to set the customized
ventilation mode list that will be available on the Vent Setup menu.
When the Select Layout menu is accessed, the user can choose
between All or Selected Vent modes.
Selected Modes
VCV Yes Yes or No
PCV Yes Yes or No
PCV-VG Yes Yes or No
SIMV-VC Yes Yes or No
SIMV-PC Yes Yes or No
BiLevel Yes Yes or No
CPAP/PSV Yes Yes or No
SIMV-PCVG Yes Yes or No
VG-PS Yes Yes or No
Previous Menu
Neonatal Increase O2 Select a value to add to the current O2 setting for Oxygenation and
Suction procedures for neonatal patients. See “Neonatal option” in
Section 13 for more information.
Parameter settings
Parameter Settings
TV Based on ATPD ATPD or BTPS
CO2 Numbers Dry Dry or Wet
Previous Menu
10-12 M1205553
Default menus Defaults are the initial settings when the ventilator is first powered on.
Many of these may be changed to configure the ventilator to the
facility’s preference.
The Default Type indicates the selection for Patient Type in the
Select Patient menu on power up.
Defaults
Scroll Settings
Default Type Adult Adult, Ped, Neo
View:
Adult
Pediatric
Factory
Neonatal
Neo Factory
Save Current No No or Yes
Factory Reset No No or Yes
Previous Menu
Note If the Neonatal option is not installed the neonatal menu items will not
be selectable.
Viewing default settings Adult, Pediatric, Factory, Neonatal or Neo Factory default settings
may be viewed in the Defaults menu.
3. Select Defaults - Adult, Pediatric, Factory, Neonatal or Neo
Factory.
4. Select Scroll Settings to scroll through the current default view.
Changing default 1. Turn the ventilator on.

settings 2. Select the desired patient type, ventilation mode, ventilation
settings and alarm limits, as described in “Preparing the ventilator
for a patient” in section 4.
5. Select Defaults - Save Current - Yes.
6. Turn the ventilator off.
Repeat the process for all other patient types.
Factory defaults are the settings Datex-Ohmeda has installed. These
cannot be changed. To return the ventilator to the factory defaults,
select Factory Reset - Yes.
M1205553 10-13
Data transfer settings Patient data from the Engström Carestation may be transferred to a
menu PC using a USB drive or SD card.
3. Select Data Transfer Settings.
4. Select USB, SD, or Both.
• If USB is selected, SD will be disabled.
• If SD is selected, USB will be disabled.
• If Both is selected, USB and SD will be enabled.
See Section 15 “EView” for detailed information.

Transfer Media USB USB, SD or Both
Previous Menu
10-14 M1205553
Calibration menus Several calibrations and tests may be performed through the
Calibration menu. Selecting a menu item will automatically begin the
calibration or test. Calibrations can be performed more frequently, as
needed, for optimal performance.
Calibration Recommended Frequency

O2 FCV 6 months
Air FCV 6 months
Exhalation Valve 6 months
Backlight Test 1 month
Gas Calibration 2 months
Upon initial installation or software upgrade, a general message will

be set on the display indicating when a calibration is needed. To clear
this message after calibration, select Cal. Flag - Off.
Calibration
O2 FCV
Air FCV
Exhalation Valve
Backlight Test
Gas Calibration
Cal. Flag On On or Off
Previous Menu
O2 FCV
Start Calibration
Previous Menu
Last Calibration:
M1205553 10-15
Air FCV
Start Calibration
Previous Menu
Last Calibration:
Exhalation Valve
Start Calibration
Previous Menu
Last Calibration:
10-16 M1205553
Backlight Test
Start Test
Previous Menu
Last Test:
Gas Calibration
CO2 Zero
O2 Zero
Previous Menu
Last Calibration:
M1205553 10-17
10-18 M1205553
11 Specifications
In this section Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Pneumatic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Ventilation operating specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Airway module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
EVair 03 compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Electrical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
EC-60601-1 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
M1205553 11-1
Physical specifications
All specifications are approximate values and can change without
notice.
Engström with the cart
Height (display up) 145 cm

Height (display down) 122 cm
Width 53 cm
Depth 78 cm
Weight (without compressor) 76 kg
Weight (with compressor) 108 kg
Engström without the cart
Height (display up) 67.5 cm

Height (display down) 44.5 cm
Width 38 cm
Depth 36 cm
Weight 31 kg
Environmental specifications
Thermal Humidity Altitude

Operating range 10 to 40°C 15 to 95% RH, -440 to 3565 m
non-condensing (800 to 500 mmHg)
Storage range -20 to 65°C 15 to 95% RH, -440 to 5860 m
non-condensing (800 to 375 mmHg)
Pneumatic specifications
Supply gas Medical air and oxygen

Supply pressure - max 6.5 bar, 94 psi, 650 kPa
Supply pressure - min 2.4 bar, 35 psi, 240 kPa
Supply gas flow - peak 160 l/min per gas supply
Maximum flow 200 l/min
Maximum limited 100 cmH2O
pressure
Range of inspiratory 1 to 100 cmH2O ± 10%
pressure
Minimum limited -1 cmH2O
pressure
(subatmospheric)
Internal compliance 0.189 ml/cmH2O
Maximum working 7 to 100 cmH2O
pressure range
11-2 M1205553
11 Specifications
Negative pressure is not available in the expiratory phase.

In the event that the ventilator is unable to provide pneumatic support,
spontaneous respiration may be achieved from air entrainment
through the free breathing valve with these inspiratory resistances
and a 1.5 m circuit:
• -4.7 cmH2O at 60 l/min and TV > 300 ml.
• -2.3 cmH2O at 30 l/min and 30 ml < TV < 300 ml.
• -1.1 cmH2O at 5 l/min and TV < 30 ml.
Electrical specifications
WARNING Use the battery if the integrity of the protective earth

conductor is in doubt.
Supply voltage 85 to 132 Vac 47 to 63 Hz

190 to 264 Vac
Electrical power < 200 W
consumption
Fuses
Type Rating Replacement Part Number

Mini blade 15 A Contact a 1011-3485-000
Datex-Ohmeda trained
5 x 20 mm time 2 A, 250 V Power down and unplug 1503-3073-000
delayed ventilator. Remove
screws to plate covering
fuse. Remove fuse and
replace with a new fuse.
(See Figure 2-2 for
location of fuse.)
M1205553 11-3
Battery information
WARNING Check performance of battery annually; replace when

necessary.
Use only Datex-Ohmeda recommended batteries.
Only Datex-Ohmeda trained service representatives are to replace
the batteries. Batteries will slowly discharge when the system is not
plugged in. Datex-Ohmeda recommends periodically plugging the
system in to AC mains to recharge the internal batteries. Batteries
must be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulatory
requirements in effect at the time and place of disposal.
Internal batteries The system is not intended for use during the transport of patients
between facilities. Two internal 12 Vdc sealed lead-acid batteries
supply battery backup. Batteries are used as backup power in case of
a power failure. The battery is in a float charge state as long as the
system is connected to a primary electrical source.
• Capacity to operate for 30 to 120 minutes, depending on settings,
under normal operating conditions.
• Ampere-hour rating: 4 A-h
• Voltage requirement: 12 Vdc
• Current requirement: 7.5 A
• Shelf life: 9 months following last charge.
• Recharge time: full discharge to full charge in 8 hours.
• Estimated life: four to six years; 250 100% discharge cycles.
• The System Status menu shows the status of the internal
battery.
11-4 M1205553
11 Specifications
Ventilation operating specifications
Ventilation settings See “Neonatal Option” in Section 13 for Neonatal specifications. See
“Non-invasive Option” in Section 14 for NIV and nCPAP
specifications.
Control Range Resolution

Bias Flow 2 to 10 l/min 0.5 l/min
End Flow 5 to 80% 5%
FiO2 21 to 100% 1%
Flow 2 to 160 l/min (Adult) 2 to 40 by 1 l/min
2 to 90 l/min (Ped) 40 to 160 by 5 l/min
Flow Trigger 1 to 9 l/min 1 to 3 by 0.1 l/min
3 to 9 by 0.5 l/min
I:E 1:9 to 4:1 0.1
Insp Pause 0 to 75% 5%
Minute Volume 0.5 to 90 l/min None. Not a direct user
setting.
PEEP Off, 1 to 50 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Phigh 1 to 98 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Pinsp 1 to 98 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Plimit 7 to 100 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Plow Off, 1 to 50 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Pmax 7 to 100 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Pressure Trigger -10 to -0.25 cmH2O -10 to -3 by 0.5 cmH2O
-3 to -0.25 by 0.25 cmH2O
Psupp 0 to 60 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
PSV Rise Time 0 to 500 ms 50 ms
Rate 3 to 120 /min 1 /min
1 to 60 /min (SIMV and
BiLevel-VG modes
only)
0 to 60 /min (CPAP/
PSV)
Rise Time 0 to 500 ms 50 ms
Thigh 0.25 to 15 s 0.25 to 1 by 0.05 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 15 by 0.25 s
Tinsp 0.25 to 15 s 0.25 to 1 by 0.05 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 15 by 0.25 s
Tlow 0.25 to 18 s 0.25 to 1 by 0.05 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 18 by 0.25 s
Tpause 0 to 11 s 0 to 1 by 0.05 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 11 by 0.25 s
Trig Window 0 to 80% 5%
TV 20 to 2000 ml 20 to 50 by 0.5 ml
50 to 100 by 1ml
100 to 300 by 5 ml
300 to 1000 by 25 ml
1000 to 2000 by 50 ml
M1205553 11-5
Alarm settings
Alarm Range Default
Apnea Time 10 to 60 s 30 s
Pmax 7 to 100 cmH2O 30 cmH2O
Low Ppeak 1 to 97 cmH2O 4 cmH2O
Low MVexp 0.01 to 40 l/min 2 l/min Adult
1 l/min Ped
High MVexp 0.4 to 99 l/min 10 l/min Adult
5 l/min Ped
Low TVexp Off, 5 to 1950 ml Off
High TVexp 10 to 2000 ml, Off Off
Low RR Off, 1 to 99 /min Off
High RR 2 to 120/min, Off Off
Low EtCO2 Off, 0.1 to 14.9% 3%
High EtCO2 0.2 to 15%, Off 8%
Low EtO2 Off, 10 to 99% Off
High EtO2 11 to 100%, Off Off
Low FiO2 18 to 99% 44%
High FiO2 24 to 100%, Off 56%
High PEEPe Off, 5 to 50 cmH2O Off
Low PEEPe Off, 1 to 20 cmH2O Off
High PEEPi Off, 1 to 20 cmH2O Off
Paux 12 to 100 cmH2O 30 cmH2O
11-6 M1205553
11 Specifications
Waveforms
Waveform Filtering Technique
Paw 40 ms low pass filter.
Flow 40 ms low pass filter.
Volume 40 ms low pass filter.
CO2 < 400 ms rise time.
O2 < 400 ms rise time.
Nebulizer Nebulizer drug delivery rate is >0.2 ml/min.
Ventilation delivery The following specifications apply to ventilation delivery and

specifications monitoring under the following conditions:
• Power-up self tests performed at ambient conditions and after a
10 minute warm-up period.
• Completed and passed all checkout tests.
• Operating at steady state (for example, after stabilized following a
patient or setting change).
• Operating with and without a humidifier.
• Operating with and without a Datex-Ohmeda heat-moisture
exchanger.
• Operating at EN794 and ASTM F1100 patient conditions.
• Operating at 21°C and at 1000 mbar ambient pressure.
• All volumes are at ambient temperature and pressure, dry
(ATPD).
Tidal volume delivery Mixture accuracy is measured at one meter from the outlet port.
Accuracy ± 10% of setting or ± 5 ml, whichever is greater

1σ repeatability ± 2% or ± 3 ml, whichever is greater
Change response time < 6 breaths
90% full scale (FS)
M1205553 11-7
Inspired pressure These values apply only to PCV and CPAP/PSV modes. Pressure
control responses are measured from the beginning of the measured
pressure step change.
Accuracy ± 2 cmH2O
1σ repeatability ± 1 cmH2O
PEEP control Pressure responses are measured from the beginning of the
measured pressure step change.
Accuracy ± 2 cmH2O
1σ repeatability ± 1 cmH2O
Oxygen - air mixing Mixture accuracy is measured at one meter from the outlet port.
accuracy
Accuracy ± 3% volume/volume of setting
1σ repeatability ± 1% volume/volume of setting
Mixture deviation > 75 ms ± 5% volume/volume at steady state level
within inspiratory phase of
breath
Change response time - < 6 breaths or 30 seconds, whichever is longer
90% FS
Inspiratory and The Datex-Ohmeda circuits recommended for this ventilator do not
expiratory resistance exceed values of 6 cmH2O for flows at 60 l/min (adult) and 30 l/min
(pediatric) when used with the breathing circuits listed in the “Parts”
section.
11-8 M1205553
11 Specifications
Ventilator monitoring This section only covers those monitoring measurements specific to
specifications the ventilator.
Several measurements have the same range, resolution, filtering
technique, and accuracy and are grouped together in the table.
Measurements Range Resolution Filtering Technique Accuracy

Ppeak -20 to 120 cmH2O 1 cmH2O Value from the last ± 2 cmH2O
Pmean detected breath.
Pplat
PEEPe
PEEPi
PEEPe+i
Paux Peak
Paux Mean
Paux Min
MVexp 0 to 99.9 l/min 0 to 1.0 by 0.01 l/min Running value for the last See TV accuracy.
MVinsp 1.0 to 99.9 by 0.1 l/ one minute + one breath.
MVspont min
MVmech
TVexp 5 to 2500 ml at 5 to 50 by 0.1 ml Value from the last ± 10% or ± 15 ml,
TVinsp flows between 1 50 to 2500 by 1 ml detected breath. whichever is greater.
TVspont and 200 l/min
TVmech
RR 0 to 120 /min 1 /min Running value for the last ± 1/min
RRspont one minute + one breath.
RRmech
Compl 0.1 to 150 ml/ 0.1 to 10 by 0.1 ml/ Five breath median filter. ---
cmH2O cmH2O After an inspiratory hold
procedure, static
10 to 150 by 1 ml/ compliance will be
cmH2O displayed for 5 breaths.
Raw 1 to 500 cmH2O/l/s 1 cmH2O/l/s Five breath median filter. ---
FiO2 10 to 100% 1% 15 s moving average. ± 3% volume/volume
with < 30 s, 10 to 90%
FS response
Drift: 0.0025% in 24 h
RSBI 1 to 999 /min/l 1 /min/l Running value for the last See TV and RR
one minute + one breath. accuracy.
M1205553 11-9
Airway module specifications

This system is compatible with the E series modules E-miniC, E-CO,
E-COV, E-COVX, E-CAiO, E-CAiOV, and E-CAiOVX and the
M series modules M-miniC, M-CO, M-COV, M-COVX, M-CAiO,
M-CAiOV, and M-CAiOVX. (Modules must be software revision 3.2
and above. E-miniC and M-miniC modules must be software version
1.0 and above.)
Gas specifications
Airway humidity 0 to 100% condensing
Sampling delay 2.5 seconds typical with a 3 m sampling line
Total system response time 2.9 seconds typical with a 3 m sampling line,
including sampling delay and rise time
Warm-up time 2 minutes for operation with CO2, O2, and N2O
5 minutes for operation of anesthetic agents
30 minutes for full specifications
Important The system is not intended for use with anesthetic agents.
Accuracy under different conditions:

• Ambient temperature 10 to 40°C, • During warm-up 2 to 10 minutes
within ±5°C of calibration (anesthetic agents 5 to 10 minutes),
• Ambient pressure 500 to 800 under normal conditions.
mmHg, ±50 mmHg of calibration • Paw <= 60 cmH2O
• Ambient humidity 10 to 98% Rh,
±20% RH of calibration
• During warm-up 10 to 30 minutes,
under normal conditions.
• Paw <= 60 cmH2O
CO2 ± (0.3 vol% + 4% of reading) ± (0.4 vol% + 7% of reading)
O2 ± (2 vol% +2% of reading) ± (3 vol% + 3% of reading)
11-10 M1205553
11 Specifications
Typical performance
CO2 Measurement range 0 to 15 vol% (0 to 15 kPa, 0 to 113
mmHg).
Measurement rise time <400 ms typical.
Accuracy ± (0.2 vol% +2% of reading).
Gas cross effects <2 vol% (O2, N2O, anesthetic agents).
O2 Measurement range 0 to 100 vol%.
Measurement rise time <400 ms typical.
Accuracy ± (1 vol% +2% of reading).
Gas cross effects <1 vol% anesthetic agents, <2 vol%
N2O.
VCO2 and VO2 Measurement range 20 to 1000 l/min
Accuracy (valid for respiration rates of 4 to 35/min
FiO2 <65 ± 10% or 10 ml
65% < FiO2 < 85% ± 15% or 15 ml
FRC Accuracy ± 20% or 180 ml
Repeatability ± 10% when conducted under the same
settings and conditions.
M1205553 11-11
EVair 03 compressor
Specifications
Pneumatic
Output flow ≥ 36 l/min at 500 kPa (72 psi)
(continuous)
Output flow (peak) ≥ 160 l/min
Reserve capacity 1.5 liters at output pressure
Air quality oil-less design
ISO compressed air purity classes ISO 8573-1
1,7,1
CGA Compressed Air for Human Respiration Type
I, Grade E
Dew point depression ≥ 5°C below ambient temperature at maximum
(pump) output pressure and flow
Output pressure 550 kPa (80 psi) nominal
(pump)
Reserve operation ≥ 250 kPa (36 psi) pipeline pressure
Safety relief valve 1000 ± 100 kPa (145 ± 14.5 psi)
Electrical
120 V~, 60 Hz, 15 A Operating voltage must be 120 V ± 10%
230 V~, 50 Hz, 10 A Operating voltage must be 230 V ± 10%
Compressor pump Protected internally with circuit breaker rated at
9 A for 120 V, and 5 A for 230 V
Accessory outlet Reverse IEC 60320 powers designated
Datex-Ohmeda accessories only
11-12 M1205553
11 Specifications
Compressor
pneumatic diagram
AB.98.004
1. Pipeline air inlet
2. Pipeline pressure gauge
3. Filter
4. Pressure switch
5. Uni-directional valve
6. Safety relief valve
7. Reservoir
8. Outlet
9. Manual drain
10. Pump pressure gauge
11. Pressure limiting valve
12. Muffler
13. Membrane air dryer
14. Start-up valve
15. Drain bottle
16. Drain valve
17. Heat exchanger
18. Pump
19. Inlet filter/muffler
Figure 11-1 • Pneumatic diagram of compressor
M1205553 11-13
Compressor
electrical block
diagram
AB.98.003
1. Capacitor
2. Pump
3. Hourmeter
4. Drain valve
5. Start-up valve
6. Fan
7. Temperature switch
8. Thermal switch
9. Pressure switch
10. Power switch/circuit breaker
11. AC mains inlet
12. Accessory outlet
Figure 11-2 • Electrical diagram for compressor
11-14 M1205553
11 Specifications
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved
by Datex-Ohmeda could cause EMC issues with this or other
equipment. Contact Datex-Ohmeda for assistance. This device is
designed and tested to comply with applicable regulations regarding
EMC as follows.
WARNING Use of portable phones or other radio frequency (RF)

emitting equipment near the system may cause
unexpected or adverse operation. Monitor operation when
RF emitters are in the vicinity.
w Use of other electrical equipment on or near this system

may cause interference. Verify normal operation of
equipment in your configuration before use on patients.
Guidance and The system is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic
manufacturer's environment. The customer and/or the user of the system should
assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described
declaration - below.
electromagnetic
emissions
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The system uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF
CISPR 11 emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class B The system is suitable for use in all establishments, including domestic
CISPR 11 establishments and those directly connected to the public low-voltage power
supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Harmonic emissions Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 Class
A
Voltage fluctuations/ Complies
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
M1205553 11-15
Guidance and The system is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic
manufacturer's environment. The customer and/or the user of the system should
assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described
declaration - below.
electromagnetic
immunity
Power immunity
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2 test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
level
Electrostatic ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic

discharge (ESD) ± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air tile. If floors are covered with synthetic
IEC 61000-4-2 material, the relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ± 2 kV for power supply ± 2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst lines supply lines commercial and/or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output
lines lines
Surge IEC ± 1 kV differential mode ± 1 kV differential Mains power quality should be that of a typical
61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode mode commercial and/or hospital environment.
±2 kV common mode
Voltage dips, < 5% UT (> 95% dip in < 5% UT (> 95% dip Mains power quality should be that of a typical
short UT) for 0.5 cycle in UT) for 0.5 cycle commercial and/or hospital environment. If the
interruptions and 40% UT (60% dip in 40% UT (60% dip in user of the system requires continued
voltage variations UT) for 5 cycles UT) for 5 cycles operation during power mains interruptions, it
on power supply 70% UT (30% dip in 70% UT (30% dip in is recommended that the system be powered
input lines UT) for 25 cycles UT) for 25 cycles from an uninterruptible power supply or a
IEC 61000-4-11 battery.
< 5% UT (> 95% dip in < 5% UT (> 95% dip
UT) for 5 sec. in UT) for 5 sec.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m If display distortion or other abnormalities
(50/60 Hz) occur, it may be necessary to position the
magnetic field system further from sources of power
IEC 61000-4-8 3 frequency magnetic fields or to install
magnetic shielding. The power frequency
magnetic field should be measured in the
intended installation location to assure that it is
sufficiently low.
Note: UT is the AC mains voltage before application of the test level.
11-16 M1205553
11 Specifications
Radiated immunity
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2 test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Level Recommended separation distance
Portable and mobile RF communications

equipment should be used no closer to any
part of the system, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation appropriate for the
frequency of the transmitter.
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms (V1) D=3.5√P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
outside ISM bands
10 Vrms 10 Vrms (V2) D=12√P
150 kHz to 80 MHz in
ISM bands
Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m (E1) D=1.2√P 80 mHz to 800 mHz
IEC 61000-4-3
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz D=3.5√P 800 mHz to 2.5 GHz

Where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and D is the
recommended separation distance in meters
(m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
should be less than the compliance level in
each frequency range.
The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795 MHz;
13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
The compliance levels in the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80
MHz to 2.5 GHz are intended to decrease the likelihood that a portable communications device could cause
interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas. For this reason, an additional factor of 10/3 is used in
calculating the recommended separation distance for transmitters in these frequency ranges.
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the system is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance level above, the system should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the system.
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 1 V/m.
Note: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects, and people.
M1205553 11-17
Recommended The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in

separation distances which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the
user of the system can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the system as
recommended below, according to the maximum power of the
communications equipment.
Separation distance in meters (m) according to frequency of the transmitter

Rated maximum 150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
output power of Outside ISM bands In ISM bands
transmitter
watts (W)
0.01 0.35 1.2 0.12 0.23

0.1 1.1 3.8 0.38 0.73
1 3.5 12 1.2 2.3
10 11 38 3.8 7.3
100 35 120 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance D in
meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 1: At 80 MHz to 800 MHz the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: The ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795
MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
Note 3: An additional factor of 10/3 is used in calculating the recommended separation distance for transmitters in
the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz to decrease
the likelihood that mobile/portable communications equipment could cause interference if it is inadvertently brought
into patient areas.
Note 4: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects, and people.
11-18 M1205553
11 Specifications
Electrical safety
The system provides connections for items such as printers, visual
displays and hospital information networks. When these items (non-
medical equipment) are combined with the system, these precautions
must be followed:
• Do not place items not approved to IEC 60601-1 closer than 1.5
m to the patient.
• All items (medical electrical equipment or non-medical electrical
equipment) connected to the system by a signal input/signal
output cable must be supplied from an AC power source which
uses a separating transformer (in accordance with IEC 60989) or
be provided with an additional protective earth conductor.
• If a portable multiple socket outlet assembly is used as an AC
power source, it must comply with IEC 60601-1. The assembly
must not be placed on the floor. Using more than one portable
multiple socket outlet assembly is not recommended.
Do not connect non-medical electrical equipment directly to the AC
outlet at the wall instead of an AC power source which uses a
separating transformer. Doing so may increase enclosure leakage
current above levels allowed by IEC 60601-1 in normal conditions
and under single-fault conditions. This may cause an unsafe electrical
shock to the patient or operator.
After connecting anything to these outlets, conduct a complete
system leakage current test (according to IEC 60601-1).
WARNING An operator of the medical electrical system must not

touch non-medical electrical equipment and the patient
simultaneously. This may cause an unsafe electrical
shock to the patient.
EC-60601-1 Classification
The system is classified as follows.
• Class I equipment.
• Type B equipment.
• Type BF equipment.
• Ordinary equipment.
• Not for use with flammable anesthetics.
• Continuous operation.
M1205553 11-19
11-20 M1205553
In this section FRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

SpiroDynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Lung INview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
INview Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
INview Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
M1205553 12-1
FRC
FRC theory The measurement of Functional Residual Capacity (FRC) represents

the volume in the lungs at the end of a normal expiration. An increase
in the FRC indicates hyper-inflation due to an increased resistance or
a specific disease like emphysema. A decrease in FRC indicates a
patient with reduced lung compliance. The FRC value calculation is
accessed through the FRC INview menu. The FRC calculation is
based on the nitrogen washout method using a step change in the
oxygen/air concentration delivered to the patient by the ventilator.
The FRC value is calculated through the use of a D-lite sensor and an
airway module with energy expenditure capabilities (E-COVX,
E-CAiOVX, M-COVX, M-CAiOVX).
An FRC procedure takes two measurements. When an FRC
procedure is started, the system captures a baseline of N2
concentration and then changes the set O2 to the set FRC O2. After a
few breaths, a curve beings to plot on the graph. A measurement
takes approximately 20 breaths. Upon completion of the first
measurement the FRC value is displayed, the N2 concentration is
captured, and the O2 changes back to the original set O2. The
second measurement starts. After a few breaths, the second curve
begins to plot on the graph. When the second measurement is
completed, the second FRC value is displayed.
Performing FRC The FRC can be performed as a single procedure or as a series of

procedures. When FRC is performed in a series, the measurements
continue at the set interval until the user stops the series.
Measurements are displayed numerically and graphically.
Two volume curves show in the graph and two measurements are
listed in the data area below the graph.
When another FRC procedure is performed:
• The two measurements are averaged and move down one row.
The values from the most recent five procedures are shown.
• The two curves are averaged into one single reference curve.
The four remaining curves are saved in the reference curve
memory.
If the value of the second measurement for the FRC procedure is not
within 25% of the first FRC measurement, the curves and values are
not averaged.
Important A constant level of delivered O2 is needed to capture an accurate
baseline N2 concentration for the nitrogen washout process. The first
FRC measurement may be inaccurate if the delivered O2 is changed
within 5 minutes of starting an FRC measurement. Consecutive FRC
measurements require a 5 minute stabilization period between
measurements.
Important Adding a 5-ml spacer between the D-lite sensor and the patient wye
will prevent the bias flow from adversely affecting the metabolic
measurements.
12-2 M1205553
AB.98.132
3
1. Current curves
2. Reference curve
3. Number of breaths axis
4. FRC volume axis
Figure 12-1 • FRC INview graph
Important Do not change any ventilation settings, perform any procedures that
alter ventilation settings, perform a nebulization procedure, or remove
an airway module during this procedure. These actions stop the
current measurement, resulting in invalid data shown as dashes. To
attain a valid FRC measurement there must be stable metabolic
monitoring for at least 10 minutes.
Important Ensure that the airway module has warmed up for 30 minutes before
performing an FRC procedure.
1. Push Spirometry.
2. Select FRC INview.
3. Set the FRC O2.
• The FRC O2 is adjustable to within plus or minus 10% of the
set O2 value. The FRC O2 setting is the value used for the
nitrogen washout calculation.
4. Set the Series Interval time if performing a series of procedures.
• Set to 1 to 12 hours.
5. Select Start Single or Start Series.
• The menu item changes to Stop Single or Stop Series.
• The delivered O2 changes to the FRC O2 setting.
• ‘FRC On’ shows in the flow waveform field.
• ‘Calculating FRC’ shows in the general message field.
Important The series will cancel if the set O2 is decreased during a series
interval when the FRC O2 was originally set lower than the O2. This
prevents an unintended lower setting of FRC O2.
M1205553 12-3
6. The FRC measurements are taken. The curve shows in the

graph. The date, time, FRC, and PEEPe+i values show below the
graph.
• When performing a series of procedures, the FRC
measurements continue at the set interval until the user stops
the series. The Next Start value shows the time of the next
automatic FRC procedure.
7. To show a specific reference curve, select Reference Curve and
the time of the curve to display. The reference curve displays in a
different color on the graph and in the data area.
8. To stop an active FRC procedure, select Stop Single or Stop
Series.
FRC INview scaling The graph scaling is set to AUTO by default. To change the scaling:
1. In the FRC INview menu, select FRC Scaling.
2. Set the FRC Scale and Breath Scale to the desired number.
3. Select Previous Menu to return to the FRC INview menu.
12-4 M1205553
PEEP INview The PEEP INview procedure can be used to see how a change in the
PEEP value affects the FRC value. A series of FRC measurements
are taken at varying PEEP levels. The first measurement is taken at
the Initial PEEP value, the last measurement is taken at the End
PEEP value. The measurements in between are taken at values
spaced as evenly as possible across the Initial PEEP to End PEEP
range. A maximum of five PEEP measurements are allowed during a
PEEP INview procedure.
4
3
AB.98.129
2
1. PEEP INview curve

2. PEEP axis
3. FRC volume axis
4. Reference curve
Figure 12-2 • PEEP INview graph
Important Do not change any ventilation settings, perform any procedures that
alter ventilation settings, perform a nebulization procedure, or remove
an airway module during this procedure. An interruption in the
measurements can result in invalid data calculations. Invalid data
shows as dashes.
1. Push Spirometry.
2. Select FRC INview - PEEP INview.
3. Set the FRC O2.
• The FRC O2 is adjustable to within plus or minus 10% of the
set O2 value.The FRC O2 setting is the value used for the
nitrogen washout calculation.
4. Set the Initial PEEP.
5. Set the End PEEP.
Note When setting the Initial PEEP and End PEEP, the values are
checked against the constraints from other ventilation settings. The
values will be set to Off if the constraints from the other ventilation
settings do not allow the PEEP values to be set. When both Initial
M1205553 12-5
PEEP and End PEEP are forced to Off, the Start selection is
disabled.
6. Set the number of Measurements to be taken.
• The maximum setting is 5. This is the default setting.
• If the number of measurements set is not feasible between
the Initial PEEP and End PEEP, the value will change to the
maximum measurements possible when the procedure is
started.
7. Select Start.
• The menu item changes to Stop.
• The measurements begin.
• The delivered O2 changes to the FRC O2 setting. The
delivered O2 alternates between the set O2 and the set FRC
O2 at each measurement.
• A white dot is plotted on the graph at the intersection of the
set PEEP and calculated FRC value to form the PEEP Curve.
The expected time between each plotted measurement is
approximately 50 breaths or 5 minutes.
• The Set PEEP, FRC, and PEEPe+i values show below the
graph.
• ‘FRC On’ shows in the flow waveform field.
• ‘Calculating FRC’ shows in the general message field.
8. To stop an active PEEP INview procedure, select Stop.
9. To display a PEEP INview reference curve:
• Select Reference Curve and the time of the reference to
display. The references display in a different color on the
graph area.
• Reference curves are saved for six consecutive Peep INview
procedures.
• Select Reference Curve - None to remove the reference
curve from the Peep INview display.
12-6 M1205553
FRC Log The patient’s FRC value can change after a change in the ventilation
parameters or after performing a procedure. The FRC Log shows
when the FRC value was calculated and specific events that occurred
between FRC calculations. Analyzing the information in the FRC Log
can help the user determine the positive and negative effects of
events on the FRC values. The FRC Log shows the most recent 350
events in chronological order with the latest data at the top. The log is
cleared when the system is turned off.
FRC measurements are averaged for the FRC INview menu, but are
not averaged in the FRC Log. Both measurements will show in the
log. Only the events shown in the following table will show in the log.
The event, value, and date and time of the event will show.
1. To view the FRC Log, push Spirometry.
2. Select FRC INview - FRC Log.
3. Select Cursor.
4. Use the ComWheel to scroll through the log.
FRC Event Value Cause

FRC/PEEPe+i: Calculated FRC value from PEEP INview PEEP INview calculation of FRC.
procedure/PEEPe+i value measured.
FRC: Calculated FRC value. An FRC value was calculated.
FRC: Measurement stopped. An Active FRC procedure was terminated.
FRC: Missed scheduled. A planned FRC series was not run.
FRC: Series stopped. An FRC series was terminated by the
system.
I:E: I:E setting. The user changed the I:E setting.
Intrinsic PEEP: Calculated PEEPi value. An Intrinsic PEEP procedure was
performed.
Mode: The mode. The user changed the Vent mode.
Nebulizer: On. A Nebulizer procedure was started.
PEEP: PEEP setting. The user changed the PEEP setting.
Plow: Plow setting. The user changed the Plow setting.
Rate: Rate setting. The user changed the Rate setting.
Suction: On. A Suction procedure was started.
Thigh: Thigh setting. The user changed the Thigh setting.
Tinsp: Tinsp setting. The user changed the Tinsp setting.
Tlow: Tlow setting. The user changed the Tlow setting.
TV: TV setting. The user changed the TV setting.
Difference/PEEP: Calculated difference from Lung INview Lung INview calculation of the volume
procedure/set PEEP value. difference.
M1205553 12-7
SpiroDynamics
SpiroDynamics SpiroDynamics is a tracheal pressure measurement obtained through

theory a catheter that provides true tracheal pressure and intrinsic PEEP
measurements regardless of the ventilation settings. SpiroDynamics
is viewed through the SpiroD menu.
The measurements are captured using an intratracheal pressure
catheter that is guided down a standard endotracheal or
tracheostomy tubes. The catheter is connected to the auxiliary
pressure port of the ventilator and attached to the patient airway. This
single-patient-use catheter is easy to insert and is purged using a
bias flow to help ensure that it remains open.
This in-line placement of the catheter provides a more accurate
measurement of pressure delivery to the lungs by removing the
resistance of the endotracheal tube from the spirometry loop. After a
breath, a dynostatic curve is calculated from the loop providing an
estimate of the alveolar pressure and volume. An algorithm creates
the dynostatic curve based on the two pressure and two flow values
for a specific volume at several points along the breath loop. This
curve is an estimate of the pulmonary compliance during a breath.
Lung mechanics and a graphical tracheal P-V loop are shown on the
display. Compliance values are calculated at three points along the
dynostatic curve and displayed:
• LOW - between 5 and 15% of the total curve.
• MID - between 45 and 55% of the total curve.
• HIGH - between 85 and 95% of the total curve.
AB.98.137
AB.98.136
1 3
1. SpiroDynamics loop using the intratracheal catheter

2. Dynostatic curve
3. Pressure-Volume loop taken at the Y-piece
Figure 12-3 • P-V loop comparison
12-8 M1205553
Important The intratracheal pressure catheter is only for pressure sensing. It

cannot be used for suctioning the patient or for sampling gases. The
catheter is for use only with endotracheal or tracheostomy tubes
having an internal diameter equal to or larger than 6.5 mm. Refer to
the Instructions for Use supplied with the intratracheal pressure
catheter for more information on the use and placement of the
catheter.
INSP EXP
AB.98.290
1. Intratracheal pressure catheter
2. Auxiliary pressure port
Figure 12-4 • Catheter connection for SpiroDynamics
M1205553 12-9
Setting up 1. Attach the intratracheal catheter connector to the auxiliary

SpiroDynamics pressure port on the system.
2. Push Spirometry.
3. Select SpiroDynamics - SpiroD Setup.
4. Set the Purge Flow to On.
Note A continuous purge flow of approximately 35 ml/min prevents the
buildup of mucous inside of the catheter.
5. Select Paux Zero to zero the pressure sensor. When completed,
‘Done’ will appear next to Paux Zero.
6. Insert the catheter according to the Instructions for Use provided
with the catheter.
7. Set the Loop Scale to the desired scaling method.
• Changing the loop scale does not affect the Paux waveform
scale.
8. Select Previous Menu to return to the SpiroD menu to view the
SpiroDynamics loops and curves.
9. To display SpiroDynamics to the left of the waveforms on the
Normal Screen:
• Push System Setup - Screen Setup - Split Screen -
SpiroD.
12-10 M1205553
Viewing The SpiroDynamics loops and curves are viewed, saved, and erased
SpiroDynamics through the SpiroD menu.
The loop and curve is displayed on every third breath when the
respiratory rate is 15 or less and on every fifth breath when the
respiratory rate is more than 15.
Up to six loop and curve sets can be saved in the memory. Once the
memory is full, the second oldest saved set is deleted at the next
save. After two or more curves are saved, they can be compared to
determine if the patient’s compliance has changed and if the inflection
points have been minimized.
1 2
AB.98.134
1. Reference loop and curve
2. Real-time loop and curve
Figure 12-5 • SpiroDynamics graph
1. Push Spirometry twice to go to the SpiroD menu.

• SpiroDynamics can also be selected from the Spirometry
menu.
2. The real-time loop and curve show in the graph. Three
compliance values, Peak, PEEPe, and Raw show below the
graph.
• The SpiroD curve shows as the thicker line.
3. Select Save Current to save the loop and curve of the displayed
breath.
• The first saved loop and curve becomes reference 1.
• If a loop and curve is displayed as reference 1, the next
saved loop and curve becomes reference 2.
• After saving six references, the next save overwrites the
second oldest reference. If this reference is a displayed
reference, it is replaced with ‘None’ until the next save.
4. To show a specific reference, select the reference to be changed
and the time of the reference to display. The references display in
a different color on the graph and in the data area.
5. The reference can be shown in the graph with both the loop and
M1205553 12-11
curve or just the loop or just the curve.

• To show both the loop and the curve for the reference, set
SpiroD Loops to On and SpiroD Curves to On.
• To show only the loop, set the SpiroD Curves to Off.
• To show only the curve, set the SpiroD Loops to Off.
6. To erase a saved reference, select Erase Reference and the
time at which the reference was saved.
Using the cursor The cursor is an easy way to quickly read the volume and pressure of
the SpiroDynamics loop and curve.
AB.98.133
2
1. Cursor
2. Pressure point of intersection
3. Volume points of intersection
Figure 12-6 • Cursor view
1. In the SpiroD menu, select Cursor.

2. Turn the ComWheel to move the cursor across the graph.
• The volume points of intersection show in top to bottom order
at the left of the graph.
• The pressure point of intersection shows below the graph.
3. Push the ComWheel to remove the cursor from the graph.
12-12 M1205553
Lung INview
When SpiroDynamics and FRC are used together, the Lung INview
procedure is available.
Lung INview measures the volume between dynostatic curves at the
set PEEP levels of the PEEP INview procedure.
When an FRC measurement is taken, data is also taken from the
SpiroDynamics loop to obtain information on absolute volume.
Comparing the volumes from several dynostatic curves results in a
difference that can be estimated as recruited volume.
An intratracheal pressure sensor catheter, an airway module with
energy expenditure capabilities, and a D-lite sensor are needed to
perform a Lung INview procedure.
AB.98.130
3
1. PEEP curve
2. PEEP curve minus the difference between SpiroDynamic dynostatic
curves
3. PEEP axis
4. FRC volume axis
Figure 12-7 • Lung INview graph
M1205553 12-13
Using Lung INview 1. Set up SpiroDynamics according to the “Setting up

SpiroDynamics” procedure.
2. Push Spirometry.
3. Select SpiroDynamics - PEEP INview.
4. Set Lung INview to On.
5. Set the FRC O2, Initial PEEP, End PEEP, and Measurements
according to the “PEEP INview” procedure.
6. Select Start.
• The menu item changes to Stop.
• The measurements begin.
• A white dot is plotted on the graph at each FRC value.
• At each PEEP, the FRC and airway resistance is measured
and a SpiroDynamics loop is saved. (Saved loops are for
calculation only and are not displayed.)
• The dynostatic curve from the measurement at the PEEP
setting is compared to the dynostatic curve taken from the
previous PEEP setting. A yellow dot is plotted on the graph
showing the difference.
• The Set PEEP, FRC, Difference, and Raw values show
below the graph.
7. To stop an active Lung INview procedure, select Stop.
12-14 M1205553
INview Troubleshooting

FRC data shows as dashes. FRC calculation was interrupted. Check that the airway module is functioning
and the ventilation parameters are constant.
Perform another FRC Procedure. Do not
change any ventilation settings or perform
any procedures that alter the ventilation
settings while an FRC procedure is active.
PEEP INview data shows as FRC calculation was interrupted. Check that the airway module is functioning
dashes. and the ventilation parameters are constant.
Perform another FRC Procedure. Do not
change any ventilation settings or perform
any procedures that alter the ventilation
settings while an FRC procedure is active.
SpiroDynamic data shows as Data calculation was interrupted. Check that the catheter is setup correctly.
dashes.
The entire FRC INview graph The scaling is not set properly. Set the FRC scaling to Auto or a larger
does not show. scale in the FRC Scaling menu.
The Lung INview procedure The catheter reading is not correct. Check that the catheter is set up properly
only shows one curve in the and is attached to the system.
graph.
The SpiroDynamics real-time The catheter reading is not correct. Check that the catheter is set up properly
loop and curve are not and is attached to the system.
showing in the graph.
The Start PEEP INview menu The airway module is not installed. Insert the airway module.
item is disabled. The airway module is not warmed up. Allow the airway module to warm up.
Another procedure is active. The menu item will enable when the
conflicting procedure is completed.
The Start Single and Start The airway module is not installed. Insert the airway module.
Series FRC INview menu The airway module is not warmed up. Allow the airway module to warm up for at
items are disabled. Another procedure is active. least 30 minutes prior to use.
The menu item will enable when the
conflicting procedure is completed.
There is a large variance in The airway module may not be fully Allow the airway module to warm up for at
the measurements during a warmed up. least 30 minutes prior to use.
single FRC procedure.
FRC or PEEP INview The airway module detects artifacts in Add a straight t-adapter between the D-lite
terminates before it begins the VO2 or VCO2 readings or the bias and the patient wye to reduce the effect of
calculation. flow is too high to properly calculate bias flow on the measurements.
VO2 or VCO2. Lower the bias flow setting.
Use a 2-meter CO2 sample line.
M1205553 12-15
INview Alarms

Cannot Informational The last attempted FRC • Ensure airway module is available and
calculate FRC measurement could not be active.
completed. • Stop any active procedures.
• Start a new FRC measurement.
• Ventilation setting changes will stop an
FRC measurement.
FRC series Informational The O2 setting was changed during • Start FRC series with desired FRC O2
stopped an FRC series interval to within 10% setting.
of the FRC O2 setting. • FRC O2 setting must be at least 10%
from the current O2 setting to prevent
termination.
Missed Informational A series FRC measurement could • Ensure airway module is available and
scheduled FRC not be started. active.
• Stop any active procedures.
• Start a new FRC measurement.
12-16 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
In this section Neonatal ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Volume guaranteed pressure support (VG-PS) . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Preparing the ventilator for a patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Performing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
INview ventilation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Neonatal Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Neonatal Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Neonatal specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
M1205553 13-1
Neonatal ventilation
The neonatal option on the Engstrom Carestation provides ventilation
for intubated neonatal patients weighing down to 0.25 kg. This is
accomplished by using a proximal flow sensor at the patient wye
which connects to the ventilator with a cable. This sensor allows the
ventilator to deliver flows as low as 0.2 l/min and as high as 30 l/min.
Several features are included with the neonatal option:
• The calculated tidal volume per unit of weight is displayed while
adjusting the tidal volume setting.
• The volume delivered per unit of weight can be displayed in the
digit field for continuous monitoring.
• Safety related limits have been imposed on ventilation settings
and alarm limits for the intended patient population.
Information presented in other sections of this manual will apply to all
patient types, including neonatal. Exceptions are detailed in this
section.
Theory of operation The system operates on a flow control basis during the inspiratory
phase of pressure modes and volume modes where the calculated
inspiratory flow is more than 2 l/min. The system drives the flow
control valves to deliver flow directly to the patient. In volume modes,
when the calculated inspiratory flow is less than 2 l/min, the system
operates in a continuous flow manner and diverts gas to the patient
by interrupting the bias flow using exhalation valve control.
The neonatal flow sensor operates using hot wire anemometry
principles whereby a wire having a large temperature to electrical
resistance relationship is placed in the stream of gas flow. Two hot
wires are present within this device and a small metallic post is
positioned between the hot wires allowing flow direction to be
determined. This sensor is used to monitor flow trigger levels, control
volume delivery, and measure inspired and expired tidal volumes.
When the neonatal flow sensor is On and disabled (e.g. unplugged),
the inspiratory phase of supported breaths will end if airway pressure
exceeds (PEEP + Psupp + 2.5 cmH2O), or if the max Tinsp is
reached. The End Flow setting is not used. Supported breaths have a
maximum inspiratory time of 0.8 seconds.
When the neonatal flow sensor is Off, ventilation in all modes is
allowed and uses data from the ventilator sensors.
13-2 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Volume guaranteed pressure support (VG-PS)

This mode is intended for use on spontaneously breathing neonatal
patients.
VG-PS will deliver pressure-supported breaths at the set tidal volume
at the patient-determined rate and inspiratory time while
compensating for changes in the patient’s lung compliance. The
ventilator adjusts the pressure support level needed to deliver the set
tidal volume breath-by breath to ensure the lowest pressure is used.
When a patient effort is detected, the ventilator delivers a pressure
supported inspiration that ends when (1) the patient’s expiratory effort
is detected by reaching the set End Flow, (2) the set tidal volume is
achieved, (3) the maximum inspiratory time (Tsupp) is reached, or (4)
high pressure is detected.
Upon entry into VG-PS, a minimum of 2 breaths or 10 seconds of
volume controlled (constant flow) breaths are delivered in response to
patient effort. This period of time allows the ventilator to assess the
patient’s lung compliance and determine the minimum pressure
support level required to deliver the set tidal volume for the next
VG-PS breath.
The pressure may vary between PEEP +2 cmH2O and 5 cmH2O
below Pmax. The maximum inspiratory pressure change between
breaths is +/- 3cmH2O. If a high airway pressure alarm becomes
active on the current breath, the next breaths’s pressure target is 0.5
cmH2O below the current breath’s pressure target.
When the Minimum Rate is set in VG-PS, the ventilator delivers
backup breaths to the patient if the patient fails to breathe
spontaneously over two Minimum Rate breath periods. These backup
breaths are PCV-VG breaths at the set TV, Minimum Rate and
Backup Tinsp settings. The patient will not be able to end these
mechanical inspirations early, but if the patient begins to
spontaneously breathe again, the ventilator resumes delivering
VG-PS breaths in response to each patient effort.
If selected to be active in PG-VS, backup ventilation is initiated if the
Apnea alarm is triggered or if the patient’s minute ventilation
decreases to below 50 percent of the set MVexp low alarm. Backup
settings may be changed in the Vent Setup menu. See “Backup
Settings” in Section 10 for more information.
M1205553 13-3
VG-PS
Exit
FiO2 50
TV 10.0
Minimum Rate 25
End Flow 25
PEEP 25
Pmax 12
Tsupp 0.80
Trigger 0.50
Bias Flow 2.0
PSV Rise Time 0
Tinsp 0.40
1. Pressure waveform
2. Patient-determined Tinsp
3. Patient-determined Texp
5. PEEP
6. Flow waveform
7. TV
Figure 13-1 • VG-PS waveforms
13-4 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Symbols
The symbols defined in the “Introduction” section also apply to the
neonatal option. When the neonatal patient type is active on the
ventilator, a symbol will appear in the upper right corner of the
display. Neonatal will appear below the clock. This symbol will also
appear in specific data areas when the Neo Flow Sensor is turned
On.
Neonatal mode is active
Neonatal flow sensor

Use the Neo Flow Sensor Setup menu to manually calibrate or turn
the neonatal flow sensor off.
Neo Flow Sensor Setup

Neo Flow Sensor On On or Off
Neo Flow Sensor Cal
Previous Menu
The neonatal flow sensor is specifically developed for use with

neonatal patients and allows proximal volume control, volume
monitoring, and flow monitoring.
1
MD24.099
MD.24.100

1 Neonatal flow sensor 1505-3272-000
2 Neonatal flow sensor cable 1505-5604-000
M1205553 13-5
Connecting the flow 1. Attach the neonatal flow sensor cable connector to port 1 on the
sensor back of the Engström.
AB.98.149
2. Connect the neonatal flow sensor to the cable.
3. Connect the neonatal flow sensor to the patient breathing circuit.
4. Connect the neonatal flow sensor to the patient airway.
AB.98.286
13-6 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Turning the flow The system will default to show information from the neonatal flow
sensor off sensor in the neonatal option.The neonatal flow sensor can be
removed to perform specific procedures (for example, nebulization).
The sensor should be turned off if it is removed from the patient
circuit.
WARNING When the neonatal flow sensor is Off, volume monitoring

and delivery accuracy is decreased.
w When the neonatal flow sensor is turned Off, additional

monitoring such as SpO2, CO2, ECG, is recommended to
protect the patient from hypo-ventilation or hypo-
oxygenation.
To turn the neonatal flow sensor off:
2. Select Neo Flow Sensor Setup.
3. Select Neo Flow Sensor.
4. Select Off.
M1205553 13-7
Calibrating the flow The neonatal flow sensor can be calibrated automatically through the
sensor Checkout procedure, or manually through the Neo Flow Sensor
Setup menu.
Important The flow sensor can only be manually calibrated when the Neonatal
Flow Sensor is Off.
To calibrate the neonatal flow sensor:
2. Select Neo Flow Sensor Setup.
3. Select Neo Flow Sensor - Off. The sensor must be disconnected
from the patient circuit and not used for monitoring during
calibration.
4. Hold the flow sensor between thumb and index finger to occlude
both ports simultaneously.
AB.98.287
5. Select Neo Flow Sensor Cal.
6. When complete, Pass or Fail will appear next to Neo Flow
Sensor Cal.
7. Select Neo Flow Sensor - On and connect the flow sensor to the
patient circuit.
Important Volume control and monitoring will be more accurate if the neonatal
flow sensor is calibrated in the following situations:
• Before use, during the Checkout procedure.
• After replacing the flow sensor.
• After a power cycle.
13-8 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Cleaning the
neonatal flow sensor
(ISO 17664
compatible)
Important Disinfection of components is achieved through the sterilization
process.
CAUTION Do not use abrasives, sharp tools, or any methods that

may damage the surface of the parts.
w Do not use automated cleaning.
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the flow sensor from the patient circuit and from the
sensor cable.
Cleaning
CAUTION Do not use compressed air or water jet to clean the

sensor.
minute. Gently agitate flow sensor if necessary to remove debris.
visible.
M1205553 13-9
Sterilization 1. Place disassembled components in sterilization pouch.

following methods.
Reassembly 1. Replace flow sensor when dry.

2. Complete a system Checkout prior to use on the next patient.
13-10 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Preparing the ventilator for a patient

Follow the procedure as listed in Section 4 “Operation and Tutorial”.
All variations in the procedure due to the neonatal option are detailed
below.
Select Patient menu The Select Patient menu appears as the first menu when the system
starts up. The default patient type is indicated by an arrow. Select
Neonatal for the neonatal settings. After entering neonatal, the
system needs to be powered off and on again to select the Adult or
Pediatric settings.
Once the Patient Setup menu item is selected the patient type will be
locked.
Important Remove or do not install compact airway modules when Neonatal is
selected as the Patient Type. If airway modules are installed, the
pumps may be active though any data is disregarded by the system.
Select Patient
Patient Type:
Adult
Pediatric
Neonatal
Patient Weight 70 kg 0.25 to 7 kg (0.5 to 15 lb) for Neo
Checkout
Bypass Checkout
Patient Setup menu Patient Weight can be set in the Patient Setup menu. Changing the
patient weight will have no effect on the settings or the alarms. The
Patient Weight will be used to calculate the tidal volume per unit of
weight in the Vent Setup menu or quick keys, and to calculate the
Volume/Weight measurements in the digit field.
Patient Setup
Checkout
Start Ventilation
Standby
Monitoring Only
Non-invasive Off On, Off, nCPAP
Patient Weight 70 kg 0.25 to 7 kg (0.5 to 15 lb) for Neo
Patient ID
Vent Setup
Vent Preferences
Previous Menu
M1205553 13-11
Pre-use checkout The ventilator is equipped with an automated checkout. Complete the
checkout before using the ventilator on a new patient. The ventilator
should be fully cleaned and prepared for a patient prior to performing
the checkout.
Checkout includes the following checks:
• Paw Transducer Check
• Barometric Pressure Check
• Relief Valve Check
• Exhalation Valve Check
• Expiratory Flow Sensor Check
• Air Flow Sensor Check
• O2 Flow Sensor Check
• O2 Concentration Sensor Check
• Neonatal Flow Sensor Check
• Circuit Leak, Compliance, and Resistance
13-12 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
WARNING To help ensure the proper function of the system, it is

highly recommended to complete the pre-use Checkout
between patients.
w Failure to complete Checkout may result in inaccurate

delivery and monitoring. Checkout should be completed
with the breathing circuit that will be used during
ventilation.
w Breathing circuits and breathing circuit components are

available in many different configurations from multiple
suppliers. Attributes of the breathing circuits such as
materials, tube length, tube diameter, and configuration of
components within the breathing circuit, may result in
hazards to the patient from increased leakage, added
resistance, or changed circuit compliance. It is
recommended that a Checkout be conducted prior to use
with each patient.
w If a Checkout is not completed, the system uses the

compliance and resistance data from the last completed
system test for all internal compensations. If the current
breathing circuit differs significantly from the previous
circuit, differences in ventilation parameters due to
changes in the compensation process are possible. This
may result in risk to the patient.
w Changing patient breathing circuits to a different

compressible volume after the checkout will affect the
volume delivery and exhaled volume measurements.
w The patient must NOT be connected to the ventilator

when completing the Checkout.
M1205553 13-13
Checkout procedure When in Standby, the Patient Setup menu will be displayed on the
normal screen.
To begin the Checkout procedure:
1. Select Checkout.
2. Attach the neonatal flow sensor to the breathing circuit that will be
used for ventilating the current patient.
3. Occlude the neonatal flow sensor with the occlusion port, as
shown below.
INSP EXP
4. Select Start Check.

• The results appear next to each check as they are
completed.
• During the checkout process, the Neo Flow Check menu
appears on the display and a tone sounds.
— Remove the occlusion from the neonatal flow sensor,
keeping the flow sensor attached to the patient circuit.
The system will detect the occlusion removal and
automatically continue the checkout.
— If the flow sensor does not pass the first part of this
check, Fail appears on the Checkout menu and the Neo
Flow Check menu does not appear. (The Neonatal Flow
sensor has a 90 day warranty.)
• When the entire checkout is finished ‘Checkout complete’ will
appear and the highlight will move to Delete Trends.
5. Select Yes to erase trends or No to retain the saved trends.
6. If one or more checks failed, select Check Help for
troubleshooting tips.
• Perform Super User calibrations if Check Help is not
successful. See Section 10 “Installation Mode”.
7. If all tests passed, select Previous Menu.
Note The circuit leak is measured at 25 cmH2O. The resistance that is
displayed is only from the inspiratory side.
If the circuit leak is greater than 0.5 l/min or Resistance or
Compliance cannot be calculated, the Circuit Check will fail.
13-14 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Important If the circuit leak is greater than 0.5 l/min or if the exhalation flow
sensor is changed after Checkout, the expiratory tidal volume
measurement may have decreased accuracy.
Important If the Relief valve failure alarm activates after system check then
system will not ventilate.
Testing alarms The Pmax, minute volume, and low O2 alarms can be tested
according to the procedures defined in the “Operation and Tutorial”
Section 4, using a neonatal patient circuit and test lung.
Apnea alarm test 1. Select System Setup - Patient Setup - Vent Preferences -
Assist Control - Off and confirm.
2. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV. Change
Rate to 3 and confirm.
Note Breath timing settings (I:E, Tinsp, TV, Flow) may need to be adjusted
to set the Rate to 3.
3. Select Alarms Setup and set Apnea time to 10 seconds.
correctly:
• The ‘Apnea’ alarm appears and sounds.
• The Respiratory Rate measurement displays ‘APN’ in a
flashing red box.
• ‘Apnea’ is displayed in red text in the Paw waveform.
Note The Apnea alarm may be cleared at the start of the following breath.
6. Select Alarms Setup and set Apnea time to the maximum
setting.
• Verify the ‘Apnea’ alarm message changes to white text on a
resolved.
M1205553 13-15
Ventilation The Airway Resistance Compensation (ARC) feature is not available

preferences menu for neonatal patient types.
Paux Setup menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Paux Setup
to access the Paux Setup menu. Use this menu to change scale
range for the auxiliary pressure waveform.
See “Auxiliary Pressure” in Section 3 for detailed information on using
the Paux Setup menu.
Select Paux Alarm to quickly access the Paux alarm limits. Use the
Paux Setup
Scale 40 AUTO, or 3 to 180 for Neo,
Purge Flow Off Off or On
Paux Zero
Paux Alarm
Previous Menu
13-16 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Scaling menu Push System Setup and select Parameters Setup - Scaling to
change loop scaling to AUTO, Linked, or Independent. Auto will
change scales to automatically accommodate the waveform size.
When Auto scaling occurs a message will display in the waveform
field. If Linked is selected Flow, Volume, and Paw waveform scales
will all change accordingly. If Indep is selected Flow, Volume, and
Paw scales can be changed independently. Use the ComWheel to
Screen to Exit.
Scaling
Scaling AUTO AUTO, Linked or Indep
Vol Scale 1200 6 to 360 for Neo
Paw Scale 40 3 to 180 for Neo,
Flow Scale 60 1 to 60 for Neo
Previous Menu
Alarms Setup menu Push Alarms Setup to access the Alarms Setup menu. Use this
menu to adjust limits, and view Alarm History. Use the ComWheel to
Screen to Exit.
Alarms Setup
Adjust Limits
Auto Limits
Default Limits
Leak Limit 50 10 to 90%, Off
Apnea Time 30 5 to 20 s for Neo*
Alarm Volume 3 1 to 5
High Alert Audio 30 0, 10, 20, 30 (s), or Off
Tdisconnect 30 0 to 60 s
Patient Effort 50 40 to 120 s
Alarm History
Previous Menu
*Off available in nCPAP.
M1205553 13-17
Performing procedures
Increase O2 and Both the ↑O2 and the suction procedures involve an increase in
suction oxygen. The increase in oxygen will default to either the current O2
setting plus the Neonatal Increase O2 setting, or 100%, whichever is
less.
Neonatal Increase O2 Oxygen may be increased in increments of 5% for neonatal patients

during Oxygenation and Suction procedures.
Important Neonatal Increase O2 increments must be set prior to the ↑ O2 or
suction procedure. See “Installation Mode,” Section 10 for more
information.
To set increased oxygen increments, follow these steps.
1. Access Install/Service - Ventilator Settings - Neonatal
Increase O2.
2. Adjust the setting and push the ComWheel to confirm.
• The increment selected will be added to the current O2
setting for neonatal patients during the ↑ O2 and suction
procedures.
3. Push Normal Screen to exit.
Nebulizer The Aeroneb Pro Nebulizer System can be used with neonatal
patient types. An adapter is available for neonatal patient circuits.
See “Parts” in Section 9 for more information.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the neonatal flow sensor, remove it

from the patient circuit during the delivery of nebulized
medication and turn the Neo Flow Sensor Off.
INview ventilation tools

FRC and SpiroDynamics are not available for use when neonatal
patient type is selected.
13-18 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Neonatal Alarms
Pushing the Silence Alarms key when no medium or high priority
alarms are active suspends audible parameter alarm tones for 30
seconds.
The alarms listed below are exclusive to the neonatal mode.
Additional alarms and alarm behavior are listed in the “Alarms and
Troubleshooting” section.

Clean neo flow Medium Neonatal flow sensor is Clean or replace neonatal flow sensor.
sensor contaminated with debris.
Neo flow sensor High Neonatal flow sensor is not 1. Check if additional flow is being added to
error reading correctly. the patient circuit.
Neo flow sensor Off Medium Neo Flow Sensor has been 1. Turn On the neonatal flow sensor in the
turned Off. Neo Flow Sensor Setup menu.
for volume monitoring while the Neo Flow
Sensor is turned Off.
Neo flow sensor High Neonatal flow sensor is not 1. Switch the orientation of the neonatal
reversed installed correctly. flow sensor.
2. Reconnect the neonatal flow sensor.
No neo flow sensor High Neonatal flow sensor not 1. Ensure neonatal flow sensor is properly
connected while ventilating. connected.
3. Turn off the Neo Flow Sensor in the Neo
Flow Sensor Setup menu.
No neo flow sensor Informational Neonatal flow sensor not 1. Ensure neonatal flow sensor is properly
connected while in Standby. connected.
3. Calibrate or turn off the Neo flow sensor
in the Neo Flow Sensor Setup menu.
Patient connection High* The measured leak is greater 1. Check for leaks at the patient connection
leak? than the set Leak Limit of the circuit.
percentage. 2. Appropriately set the Leak Limit in the
Alarms Setup Menu.
Remove airway Informational An airway module is installed Remove the airway module.
module when the patient type is set
to Neonatal.
M1205553 13-19

Replace neo flow Medium Ventilator is receiving invalid Replace neonatal flow sensor.
sensor data from the neonatal flow
sensor.
TV not achieved Medium TVinsp < 80% of the set TV, 1. Ensure the Plimit, Pmax, and TV settings
(Neonatal) or set TV - 1 ml, whichever is are appropriate for the patient's condition.
greater, for six consecutive 2. Ensure the pneumatic nebulizer flow
breaths. setting is correct.
*This alarm continues to display an alarm message after the condition has cleared.
Neonatal Troubleshooting

Neonatal flow sensor calibration Neonatal flow sensor is broken, Verify proper connections/
fails. not connected, not properly occlusions and recalibrate.
occluded, or contaminated with Clean or replace neonatal flow
debris. sensor.
Neo flow sensor check fails. Neo flow sensor fails. Clean or replace the neo flow
sensor, and ensure sensor cable is
properly connected.
Neo flow sensor is not held steady Hold flow sensor steady.
after occlusion is removed.
Ventilator does not deliver set TV Pmax alarm limit is limiting Change Pmax setting.
in PCV-VG, SIMV-PCVG, BiLevel- delivered inspiratory pressure. See Section 8 for more detailed
VG and VG-PS modes. information.
Ventilator is at minimum allowed Change ventilation settings.
delivery.
Trends
Trend information for neonatal patients varies from the adult/pediatric
information. Information is not available from the airway modules for
the neonatal option, so trends do not include module-based data.
Graphical trends The Graphical Trends pages are set with neonatal defaults that are
different from adult/pediatric defaults. Selections that are based on
the airway module are not available for neonatal trends. The defaults
can be changed in the Install/Service menu. See the “Installation
Mode” section for details.
13-20 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Neonatal specifications
Most of the specifications for neonatal patient types match those for
adult and pediatric patient types. See the “Specifications” section for
details. Exceptions are listed in the following tables.
Ventilation operating
specifications
Ventilation settings

Flow 0.2 to 30 l/min 0.2 to 5 by 0.1 l/min
5 to 30 by 0.5 l/min
Flow Trigger 0.2 to 9 l/min 0.2 to 1 by 0.05 l/min
1 to 3 by 0.1 l/min
3 to 9 by 0.5 l/min
Minute Volume 0.05 to 20 l/min None. Not a direct user
setting.
Patient Weight 0.25 to 7 kg 0.1 kg
Rate 3 to 150 /min 1 /min
2 to 60 /min (VG-PS,
SIMV and BiLevel-VG
modes only)
0, 2 to 60 /min (CPAP/
PSV)
Thigh 0.1 to 10 s 0.1 to 1.0 by 0.01 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 10 by 0.25 s
Tinsp 0.1 to 10 s 0.1 to 1 by 0.01 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 10 by 0.25 s
Tlow 0.25 to 30 s 0.25 to 1 by 0.01 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 18 by 0.25 s
Tpause 0 to 7.5 s 0 to 1 by 0.05 s
1 to 4 by 0.1 s
4 to 7.5 by 0.25 s
Tsupp 0.1 to 0.8 s 0.01 s
TV 2 to 350 ml 2 to 50 by 0.5 ml
50 to 100 by 1 ml
100 to 350 by 5 ml
M1205553 13-21
Ventilation delivery
specifications
Tidal volume delivery Mixture accuracy is measured at one meter from the outlet port.
Accuracy
with the neonatal flow sensor On ± 10% of setting or ± 1 ml, whichever is greater
with the neonatal flow sensor Off ± 10% of setting or ± 5 ml, whichever is greater
1σ repeatability
with the neonatal flow sensor On ± 2% or ± 1 ml, whichever is greater
with the neonatal flow sensor Off ± 2% or ± 3 ml, whichever is greater
Change response time 90% full scale (FS) <6 breaths
Inspiratory and The inspiratory and expiratory resistance does not exceed 6 cmH2O
expiratory resistance for flow at 5 l/min when used with the Fisher & Paykel infant breathing
circuit (RT131) and humidification chamber (MR225).
Ventilator monitoring
specifications
Measurements

MVexp 0 to 99.9 l/min 0 to 1.0 by 0.01 l/min Running value for the See TV accuracy
MVinsp 1.0 to 99.9 by 0.1 l/min last one minute + one
MVspont breath.
MVmech
TVexp 0.5 to 1000 ml at 5 to 50 by 0.1 ml Value from the last ± 10% or ± 1 ml,
TVinsp flows between 0.1 50 to 2500 by 1 ml detected breath. whichever is
TVspont and 30 l/min greater
TVmech
When the neonatal
flow sensor is off:
± 10% of setting or
± 5 ml, whichever is
greater
RR 1 to 150 /min 1 /min Running value for the ± 1/min
RRspont last one minute + one
RRmech breath.
Compl 0.1 to 150 ml/cmH2O 0.1 to 10 by 0.1 ml/ Five breath median filter. ---
cmH2O After an inspiratory hold
procedure, static
10 to 150 by 1 ml/cmH2O compliance will be
displayed for 5 breaths.
13-22 M1205553
13 Neonatal Option
Alarm settings
Alarm Range Default

Apnea Time 5 to 20 s 15 s
Low MVexp 0.01 to 10 l/min 0.2 l/min
High MVexp 0.02 to 40 l/min 0.4 l/min
Low TVexp Off, 1 to 345 ml Off
High TVexp 3 to 350 ml, Off Off
High RR 2 to 150/min, Off Off
M1205553 13-23
13-24 M1205553
In this section Non-invasive ventilation (NIV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Preparing the ventilator for a patient in non-invasive mode 14-4
Non-invasive specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Neonatal nasal CPAP mode - theory of operation . . . . . . . 14-8
Preparing the ventilator for a patient in nCPAP mode . . . . 14-9
nCPAP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
NIV and nCPAP alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Recommended non-invasive ventilation interfaces. . . . . . 14-13
NIV Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
nCPAP Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
M1205553 14-1
Non-invasive ventilation (NIV)

The Engström NIV (Non-invasive ventilation) option is designed with
two modes of non-invasive ventilation: NIV and neonatal nCPAP
(nasal continuous positive airway pressure). NIV provides positive-
pressure ventilation without the need for an invasive artificial airway.
Non-invasive ventilation should not inhibit the patient from
swallowing, talking, and using cough mechanisms. NIV is
accomplished by using a nasal or face mask and is delivered through
a positive pressure support mode, such as CPAP/PSV.
Important The Engström NIV mode is designed for use with Adult and Pediatric
patient types only.
WARNING When using NIV, the patient should demonstrate all of the
following characteristics:
• Patient is responsive.
• Patient is spontaneously breathing.
• Patient has a controlled airway.
• Patient may be in need of ventilatory support through PSV.
Symbols The symbols defined in the “Introduction,” Section 1 also apply to the
NIV and nCPAP modes. When the NIV mode is active on the
ventilator, a symbol appears in the upper right corner of the display.
Non-invasive mode is active
Note When in NIV mode, the display header and the ventilator settings
header is colored teal to signify the mode.
14-2 M1205553
NIV mode theory of NIV mode is a spontaneous breathing mode, with the capability to
operation deliver back-up PCV breaths. The Minimum Rate is the lowest rate
that the patient is required to breathe over a two-breath period before
the ventilator will deliver a backup breath. The backup breath is
delivered at the Backup Pinsp and Backup Tinsp settings. The Tsupp
setting is used to set the maximum allowable inspired time for a
spontaneous breath. During inspiration, the ventilator cycles to
expiration if the patient has not started exhalation after the set Tsupp
time.
Backup breaths are delivered if the patient stops breathing for a user
set period of time. If the pressure rises 2.5 cmH2O above the target
PEEP + PSV setting the backup breath is ended. If a spontaneous
breath is taken during the backup breath, the backup breath may end
due to end flow.
Apnea may not occur due to backup breaths. If no spontaneous
breaths are detected within the set Patient Effort time a high priority
“No patient effort” alarm will activate indicating the patient has
stopped triggering breaths.
Flow and pressure triggers are applied simultaneously in NIV mode.
As flow triggers are dramatically affected by leaks and especially
varying leaks, the default flow trigger is set to a relatively high value to
prevent auto triggers from occurring. When a flow trigger is set a
simultaneous pressure trigger is active to improve trigger detection.
Inspiratory and expiratory flow triggers are leak compensated up to
50 l/min for adults and 30 l/min for pediatric patients.
To account for patient conditions where large leaks may be present,
the Apnea Time, Leak Limit, and MVexp low arms may be turned Off
while in NIV. When any of these alarms are Off, a medium priority
alarm activates to notify the user of the alarm status. Pressing the
Silence Alarms key will de-escalate the alarm priority to an
informational alarm. This action serves as user confirmation of the
alarm setting. The informational alarm will remain on the screen while
the corresponding alarm is Off.
WARNING If the Apnea Time, Leak Limit, or MVexp low alarms are
set to Off, additional monitoring such as SpO2, ECG, CO2
is recommended to protect the patient from
hypoventilation.
If a patient triggers a breath during NIV the inspiratory phase of the
pressure and flow waveforms will be displayed in red. If a mechanical
breath is given in NIV mode, the waveform displays the set Paw
waveform color.
M1205553 14-3
Preparing the ventilator for a patient in non-invasive mode

Follow the procedure as listed in Section 4, “Operation”. All variations
in the procedure due to the NIV option are detailed below.
The Select Patient menu appears as the first menu when the system
starts up. The default patient type is indicated by an arrow.
1. Select Adult or Pediatric patient type.
Patient Setup menu.
3. Select Non-invasive - On.
• The NIV symbol appears in the right-hand corner of the
display and the Non-invasive message appears above the
ventilation settings.
• The nCPAP mode is only available for Neonatal patient
types.
4. Select Vent Setup to ensure settings are appropriate for the
patient.
5. Push Alarms Setup to ensure settings are appropriate for the
patient.
• Push Normal Screen to clear menu.
Patient Setup
Checkout
Start Ventilation
Standby
Monitoring Only
Non-invasive Off On or Off
Patient Weight 70 kg
Patient ID
Vent Setup
Vent Preferences
14-4 M1205553
Changing from non- 1. Push System Setup.

invasive mode to 2. Select the Patient Setup menu.
invasive mode 3. Disconnect the patient.
4. Select Standby.
5. Select Non-invasive - Off.
patient.
patient.
8. Push Normal Screen to clear menu.
Changing from 1. Push System Setup.

non-invasive mode 3. Disconnect the patient.
4. Select Standby.
5. Select Non-invasive - On.
patient.
patient.
8. Select Normal Screen to clear menu.
M1205553 14-5
Changing NIV mode NIV mode settings may be changed by using the Quick keys or
settings through the Vent Setup menu. When Non-invasive is set to On the
NIV Setup menu appears when Vent Setup is selected.
NIV Setup
FiO2 50 21 to 100%
PEEP 3 2 to 20 cmH2O
Psupp 5 0 to 30 cmH2O
Trigger 6 1 to 9 l/min, -10 to -0.25 cmH2O
Rise Time 200 0-500 ms
End Flow 25 5 to 80%
Tsupp 4 0.25 to 4.0 s
Bias Flow 8 8 to 20 l/min
Minimum Rate 10 0 to 40 /min
Backup Pinsp 5 1 to 30 cmH2O
Backup Tinsp 1.7 0.25 to 5.0 s
14-6 M1205553
Non-invasive specifications
Most of the specifications for Non-invasive ventilation match those for
invasive ventilation. See the “Specifications” section for details.
Exceptions are listed in the following tables.
Non-invasive mode
ventilation settings
Backup Pinsp 1 to 30 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Backup Tinsp 0.25 to 1.0 s 0.05 s
1.0 to 4.0 s 0.1 s
4.0 to 5.0 s 0.25 s
Minimum Rate 0 to 40 /min 1 /min
PEEP 2 to 20 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Psupp 0 to 30 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Tsupp 0.25 to 1.0 s 0.05 s
1.0 to 4.0 s 0.1 s
Non-invasive mode
alarm settings
Alarm Range Default
MVexp low Off, 0.01 to 40 l/min 2 l/min Adult
1 l/min Ped
Apnea time Off, 10 to 60 s 60 s
Tdisconnect 0 to 60 s 30 s
Patient effort 40 to 120 s 50 s
Pneumatic
specifications
Maximum flow 208 l/min
M1205553 14-7
Neonatal nasal CPAP mode - theory of operation

The NIV option includes Neonatal Nasal CPAP (nCPAP) functionality.
The Neonatal nCPAP mode is to be used only with neonatal patients
and is only available when both Neonatal and Non-invasive options
are installed.
Note The neonatal flow sensor is not utilized during nCPAP.
Neonatal nCPAP mode delivers gas into the infant’s airway through a
nasal cannula, nasal prong, or nasal mask. In nCPAP, a pressure
above ambient pressure is maintained on the patient’s airway. The
patient determines their own rate, tidal volume, and inspiratory timing.
The system provides a constant bias flow delivered at the set FiO2
level. Constant airway pressure is controlled with the exhalation
valve. Backup ventilation is not available while using nCPAP. To
account for patient conditions where large leaks may be present, the
Apnea Time, Leak Limit, and MVexp low arms may be turned Off
while in nCPAP. When any of these alarms are Off, a medium priority
alarm activates to notify the user of the alarm status. Pressing the
Silence Alarms key will de-escalate the alarm priority to an
informational alarm. This action serves as user confirmation of the
alarm setting. The informational alarm will remain on the screen while
the corresponding alarm is Off.
WARNING If the Apnea Time, Leak Limit, or MVexp low alarms are
set to Off, additional monitoring such as (but not limited
to) SpO2, ECG, CO2 is recommended to protect the
patient from hypoventilation.
w The Patient disconnected alarm is not enabled in nCPAP.

The Apnea, Circuit Leak?, MVexp low, and PEEPe low
alarms serve as the primary disconnection monitors.
Ensure the PEEPe low limit is appropriately set for the
patient conditions to detect a patient disconnect.
w When using nCPAP, the patient should demonstrate all of

the following characteristics:
• Patient is responsive.
• Patient is spontaneously breathing.
• Patient has a controlled airway.
• Patient does not need ventilatory support through PSV.
• Patient needs oxygen therapy.
14-8 M1205553
Preparing the ventilator for a patient in nCPAP mode

Follow the procedure as listed in Section 4, “Operation”. All variations
in the procedure due to the NIV option are detailed below.
The Select Patient menu appears as the first menu when the system
starts up. The default patient type is indicated by an arrow.
1. Select the Neonatal patient type.
Patient Setup menu.
3. Select Non-invasive - nCPAP.
types.
• The Vent Setup menu is not available for nCPAP mode. All
settings will appear in the ventilator settings area.
patient.
• Push Normal Screen to clear menu.
Patient Setup
Checkout
Start Ventilation
Standby
Monitoring Only
Non-invasive Off Off or nCPAP
Patient Weight 2 kg
Patient ID
Vent Setup
Vent Preferences
Previous Menu
M1205553 14-9

nCPAP mode to 2. Select the Patient Setup menu.
invasive mode 3. Disconnect the patient.
4. Select Standby.
5. Select Non-invasive - Off.
patient.
patient.
8. Push Normal Screen to clear menu.

nCPAP mode 3. Disconnect the patient.
4. Select Standby.
5. Select Non-invasive - nCPAP.
types.
• Vent Setup menu is not available for nCPAP mode. All
settings will appear in the ventilator settings area.
patient.
7. Select Normal Screen to clear menu.
Changing nCPAP The nCPAP mode settings may be changed by using the Quick keys.
mode settings The only parameters that may be changed in nCPAP mode are:
• FiO2
• PEEP
• Bias Flow
• Trigger
14-10 M1205553
nCPAP specifications
Most of the specifications for nCPAP ventilation match those for
invasive ventilation. Exceptions are listed in the following tables.
nCPAP mode
ventilation settings
FiO2 21 to 100% 1%
Flow Trigger 0.2 to 9 l/min 0.2 to 1 by 0.05 l/min
1 to 3 by 0.1 l/min
3 to 9 by 0.5 l/min
PEEP 2 to 15 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
Pressure Trigger Off, -10 to -0.25 -10 to -3 by 0.5 cmH2O
cmH2O -3 to -0.25 by 0.25 cmH2O
nCPAP mode alarm

settings
Alarm Range Default
MVexp low Off, 0.01 to 10.0 l/min 0.2 l/min
Apnea time 5 to 20 s, Off 20 s
nCPAP monitoring
specifications
TVexp 0.5 to 1000 ml at 5 to 50 by 0.1 ml Value from the last ± 10% or ± 5 ml,
TVinsp flows between 0.1 50 to 2500 by 1 ml detected breath. whichever is
and 30 l/min greater
M1205553 14-11
NIV and nCPAP alarms

The alarms listed below are exclusive to the NIV and nCPAP modes.
Additional alarms and alarm behavior are listed in the “Alarms and
Troubleshooting” section.

Apnea alarm off Medium Apnea alarm limit is turned Ensure the Apnea alarm setting is
off for non-invasive appropriate from the patient’s condition.
ventilation.
MVexp low alarm off Medium MVexp low alarm limit is Ensure the MVexp low alarm limit is
turned off for non-invasive appropriate for the patient’s condition.
ventilation.
No patient effort High Patient has not triggered a 1. Check the patient's status.
spontaneous breath within 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
the set Patient Effort time. 3. Check for patient disconnection.
4. Appropriately set the Patient Effort time
Patient disconnected Informational Patient circuit is 1. Check the patient's status.
disconnected from the 2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
ventilator.* 3. Check for patient disconnection.
Patient disconnected High Patient circuit is 1. Reconnect the patient to the ventilator.
disconnected from the 2. Appropriately set Tdisconnect in the
ventilator or disconnect has Alarms Setup menu.
been present for more than 3. Select Standby in the Standby menu.
the set non-invasive
Tdisconnect.*
PEEPe low High PEEPe < low alarm limit. 1. Reconnect the patient to the ventilator.
2. Check for leaks in the patient circuit.
3. Appropriately set PEEPe low alarm
4. Increase the Bias Flow.
*When a patient disconnect condition is detected an informational

alarm will activate during the set Tdisconnect period. The alarm will
escalate to high priority after the Tdisconnect period.
14-12 M1205553
Recommended non-invasive ventilation interfaces

The following interfaces for NIV have been tested and are
recommended by GE Healthcare for use with the Engström
Carestation NIV and nCPAP modes.
NIV patient interfaces shall consist of patient masks that do not
incorporate an entrainment valve. Patient circuits for both NIV and
nCPAP must be dual-limb circuits (i.e. has connections for both the
inspiratory and expiratory ports of the Engström).
NIV • Respironics PerformaTrak SE Full Face Mask (S,M,L)

• Respironics Contour Deluxe Nasal Mask (S,M,L)
• Hans Rudolph, INc. (HRI) 6500 Series V2 Mask, Oro-Nasal NIV
Disposable (Petite, XS, S, M, L)
• Hans Rudolph, Inc. (HRI) 7500 Series V2 Mask, Oro-Nasal NIV
Reusable (Petite, XS, S, M, L)
nCPAP • Fisher & Paykel Infant breathing circuit RT131, humidification

chamber MR225, nasal tubing BC180, and appropriately sized
nasal prongs.
NIV Troubleshooting
Auto-triggering Trigger setting is too sensitive • Increase the flow trigger setting.
• Use a pressure trigger.
Trigger compensation is not enabled. • Enable Trigger Compensation.
High leak • Check the patient interface.
• Check the Expiratory Flow Sensor.
Expiratory Flow Sensor problem.
No triggering or missed Trigger is not sensitive enough. • Decrease the flow trigger setting.
triggers • Increase the pressure trigger setting.
Pressure Support Endflow setting is too low. • Increase the EndFlow setting.
inspiration is too long Tsupp setting is too high. • Decrease the Tsupp setting.
High Leak • Check the patient interface.
Pressure Support Endflow setting is too high. • Decrease the EndFlow setting.
inspiration is too short Tsupp setting is too low. • Increase the Tsupp setting.
Undesired backup breaths Minimum Rate is set too high. • Decrease the Minimum Rate setting.
nCPAP Troubleshooting
Auto-triggering Trigger setting is too sensitive. • Increase the flow trigger setting.
• Use a pressure trigger.
• Turn off trigger.
Trigger compensation is not enabled. • Enable Trigger Compensation.
• Check the patient interface.
High Leak.
• Check the Expiratory Flow Sensor.
Expiratory Flow Sensor problem.
No triggering or missed Trigger is not sensitive enough. • Decrease the Flow Trigger.
triggers • Increase a Pressure Trigger.
Not enough Bias Flow. • Increase the Bias Flow setting.
M1205553 14-13
14-14 M1205553
15 EView Accessory
In this section EView accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

EView overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
EView installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Acquiring and transferring data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
EView functional testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Transferring EView data to the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
EView Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
M1205553 15-1
EView accessory
The EView electronic data logging device is an optional accessory
which allows patient and ventilator data to be downloaded from the
Engström system. Data is transferred by using a SD media card or a
USB flash drive, then uploaded onto a PC. Data can be examined
and stored electronically or can be printed for use in a patient’s
medical records.
Important The EView is designed solely for use with the Engström family of
critical care ventilators.
The data from the EView is comprised of procedure data, ventilator
settings, measured data and numerics, waveforms, alarms, checkout
data, and snapshots. Desired data can be user-configured to meet
facility needs. Higher breath rates, waveforms, smaller sample
intervals, and longer time periods may significantly increase data
transfer time.
The EView is designed for live data transfer during system operation
and can be moved from system to system as patient data is needed.
WARNING User must rely on the Engström primary displays and

controls for ventilation therapy decisions.
Note The Enhanced Serial Port and Engström System 5.05 software or
greater are required to operate EView. To upgrade from the Standard
Serial Port to the Enhanced Serial Port, order Enhanced Serial Port
M1057953. AB.98.310
Figure 15-1 • EView Data Logging Device (optional accessory)
Media compatibility Although the EView has been tested using several brands and sizes
of media available, some media may not be compatible. If issues
arise, try a different brand or size of transfer media.
The EView is not compatible with SDHC media.
Transfer times will vary depending upon the speed and size of the
transfer media. SD cards come in different transfer speed ratings, SD
cards not marked: “High Speed” or “Ultra High Speed” most likely
have only approximately 2 Mb/s capability. More recent SD cards are
capable of transferring data up to 20 Mb/s.
15-2 M1205553
15 EView Accessory
Standard serial port

1 2 3 4
AB.98.229
5
1. RS232 Serial communication port
2. Ethernet connection (not currently supported)
3. USB port (not currently supported)
5. Display connection
Figure 15-2 • Standard Serial Port
Enhanced serial port

1 2 3 4
AB.98.228
5
1. EView/RS232 Serial communication port
2. RS232 Serial communication port
3. Ethernet connection (not currently supported)
5. Display connection
Figure 15-3 • Enhanced Serial Port
M1205553 15-3
EView overview
2
3
4
66
AB.98.312
AB.98.310
7
Figure 15-4 • Front and back views of EView
1 Communication LED The green LED lights continuously when the EView is properly connected and
communicating with the serial port located on the back of the Engström.
2 SD card slot Slot for Secure Digital card.
3 Media LED The blue LED lights when data is being written to a storage device (SD card or a
USB flash drive).
4 USB Port Slot for USB flash drive.
5 Ethernet port Not currently supported.
6 Serial port connection EView communicates to and is powered by Engström through this connection.
7 Reset button Push to reset EView in the event of an error. Intended for factory use only.
CAUTION Pushing the reset button during data logging operations

could potentially corrupt the Compact Flash card resulting
in a loss of all transferred data.
15-4 M1205553
15 EView Accessory
EView installation
The EView electronic data logging accessory requires the Engström
ventilator to be equipped with a High Performance Display Unit
(HPDU) with the Enhanced Serial Port and Engström System
Software 5.05 or greater.
The following hardware is required before the EView can be used
with the Engstrom ventilator.
• Standoffs
• Enhanced serial port
Contact a GE Healthcare Authorized representative or service
personnel having experience with this type of equipment if this
hardware is not installed on your system.
Important Do not move standoffs between systems. All standoffs have Loctite
applied to the threads to hold them in place. Removal of the standoffs
will decrease the function of the Loctite and the standoffs may loosen
when trying to unscrew the EView thumbscrew.
1. Align the EView serial port to the display serial port (2) and
connect the EView to the display. Firmly press the EView against
the display to ensure the EView is securely seated onto the
connector.
AB.98p.144
Figure 15-5 • Secure display guard and EView with Standoffs
2. Tighten both Thumbscrews onto the Standoffs (1) to mount the

EView to the display unit.
M1205553 15-5
Acquiring and transferring data
Data Transfer Patient data from the Engström ventilator may be transferred to a PC
Settings menu using a USB flash drive or SD card.
Important All settings should be set prior to inserting the transfer media into the
EView. New data transfer settings will not take effect while the EView
is downloading data to media.
CAUTION Do not remove EView from a powered Engström

ventilator before the EView backup power source has fully
charged. This requires the Engström ventilator to be
powered on for a minimum of 2 minutes.
• See “Installation Mode,” in Section 10 for password
information.
3. Select Data Transfer Settings - Transfer Media.
4. Select USB, SD, or Both.
• If USB is selected, SD will be disabled.
• If SD is selected, USB will be disabled.
• If Both is selected, USB and SD will be enabled.

Transfer Media USB USB, SD or Both
Previous Menu
15-6 M1205553
15 EView Accessory
Data Transfer Setup Use the Data Transfer Setup menu to select settings for desired
menu patient data transfer.
1. Select Snapshots or Vent Data.
• Snapshots transfers only the Snapshots data for the chosen
Time Period. Snapshots is similar to a Vent Check option. If
Snapshots is selected, skip step 3.
• Vent Data collects all available data at the Sample Interval for
the chosen Time Period.
2. Select Time Period and value over which the transfer data will
span.
• Time period may be from 15 minutes to 7 day increments.
3. Select Sample Interval and value (enabled only if Vent Data was
selected).
• Data may be captured for: every breath, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 and
60 minute intervals.
4. Select Waveforms.
• On will include waveform data.
• Off will exclude waveform data.
5. Select Patients.
• Select All to transfer patient data for All patients during the
selected Time Period.
• Select Current to transfer only the patient data for the current
patient.
Important Data from the EView is transferred and identified using the patient ID.
If a patient ID was not entered, then data will be transferred by the
Engström system serial number. See “Patient ID” in Section 4 for
more information. Follow facility procedures regarding patient data
privacy protection.
Data Transfer Setup

Data to Transfer:
Snapshots
Vent Data
Time Period* 4 hr 15 min to 7 day (variable increments)
Sample Interval 15 min Breath, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
60 min
Previous Menu
*Time Period increments may be set to: 15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr,
4 hr, 8 hr, 12 hr, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days.
M1205553 15-7
Transferring EView Use the transfer media type previously selected in the Data Transfer
data to USB or SD Settings menu.
Important The EView is not compatible with SDHC media.

1. Insert the designated media type (SD card or USB flash drive).
• Insert the SD card with card label facing away from the
display.
• Do not force media into corresponding port/slot connections
as damage could occur.
AB.98.311
2. The blue data transfer LED turns on to signify that the requested
data is being downloaded.
• The time of transfer is dependent upon the amount of data
being transferred and the speed and size of the transfer
media used.
• For example, if Breath is selected for the sample interval and
Waveforms is turned On in the Data Transfer settings, data
transfer could possibly take up to one hour per day of data
transferred.
3. Remove media when the blue LED turns off.
Note Use only the blue LED on EView for download status. The LED on the
USB flash drive does not pertain to downloading through EView.
When the transfer of data is complete, the media should contain an
ASCII, tab-limited files.
CAUTION Do not remove media or shutdown the Engström

ventilator before the blue LED has illuminated or during
download as this could corrupt data on the SD card or
USB flash drive.
15-8 M1205553
15 EView Accessory
EView functional testing

Connect a patient circuit and a test lung to the ventilator to complete
the following test.
1. Mount the EView to an Engström ventilator.
2. Power up the Engström system.
3. Wait for the green LED to light indicating data transfer to the
EView.
4. Push System Setup and select the Data Transfer Setup
menu. Select the following menu items:
• Vent Data
• Time Period - 15 minutes
• Sample Interval - Breath
• Waveforms - On
• Patients - Current
5. If not already in VCV mode, select Vent Setup - VCV - Confirm.
6. Set Respiratory Rate (RR) to 20 and Tidal Volume (TV) to 300 ml
and push the ComWheel to confirm settings.
7. Select Start Ventilation and wait 60 seconds.
8. Insert USB Flash Drive or SD card into the designated port.
• Note: Use of USB Flash Drive or SD card is dependant upon
hospital preferences for Transfer Media setting.
• Most SD cards have a switch on the edge of one side of the
card. Sliding it up or down will unlock or lock the card. When
the card is locked you will not be able to transfer data.
9. Verify the blue LED lights indicating data transfer to the memory
drive. When the blue LED turns off, the data transfer is complete.
Data Transfer Setup

Data to Transfer:
Snapshots
Vent Data
Time Period* 4 hr 15 min to 7 day (variable increments)
Sample Interval 15 min Breath, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
60 min
Previous Menu
M1205553 15-9
Transferring EView data to the PC

1. Remove the transfer media from EView and insert it into the USB
port or SD card slot on the PC. The Vent Data folder displays
containing the Patient ID folder and Error Log(s).
Note log.txt files are hidden files.
To see hidden files:
• On the Tools menu in WIndows Explorer, select Folder
Options.
— To access Windows Explorer, select Start. Point to All
Programs, and select Accessories, then WIndows
Explorer.
• Select Tools, Folder Options, and then the View tab.
• Under Hidden files and folders, select Show Hidden files and
folders.
2. Double-click the Vent Data folder and then the Patient folder to
access the data text and waveform files.
• Patient ID folder naming structure:
Patientid1_mmddyy_1536001.txt
3. Ensure the text files for Settings, Measured, Waveforms,

Procedures, and Alarms data exist.
Data text file naming structure:
• A - Alarms
• C - Checkout Information
• D - Dynostatic Curves or Spirometry Data (Zip file)
• L - SpiroDynamics data from Paux
• N - Measured Data (Numeric)
• P - Procedure Data
• S - Setting
• Z - Waveform (Zip file)
The Zip file contains the W-Waveform files and the
L-Spirodynamics data files only if that option is enabled.
15-10 M1205553
15 EView Accessory
5
4
1 2 3
Figure 15-6 • Patient ID folder naming scheme
APatientID1_0812051536001
1 File identifier
2 Patient ID or machine serial number
3 Date (YYMMDD)
4 Time (HHMM)
5 File number
4. Right-click on the Settings text file and select “Open With”, then
select a spreadsheet application to view the file.
When the file opens, look under the Settings heading to verify the
following:
• Set Rate = 20
• Set TV = 300
5. Close the Settings text file and remove the media from the PC.
M1205553 15-11
EView Troubleshooting
Note Ensure that system is properly configured to support EView. See
installation procedures.

Green LED flashing Internal compact flash memory • Wait 5 minutes for system to
has been corrupted. repair memory.
• Contact a Datex Ohmeda trained
Green LED Off when properly Communications not established. • Wait 2 minutes for
connected to ventilator communications to establish.
Unit is not properly configured with • Verify that Engström system has
enhanced serial ports. Enhanced Serial Port option and
system software 5.05 or greater.
Blue LED does not illuminate The selected port/slot connection • Review Data Transfer Settings
may not have been enabled. menu procedure.
• Data transfer may have
successfully occurred. Check
media device.
Removed transfer media before • Remove and re-insert transfer
blue LED illuminated. media.
• Remove and re-connect Eview
device.
EView media connectors are • Contact Datex Ohmeda trained
damaged. service representative.
Blue LED flashing Transfer Media Error • Reformat transfer media.
• Replace Transfer media.
• Empty Transfer media.
Transfer media is incompatible. • Attempt transfer with different
brand/size of media.
Removed media during transfer. • Wait for blue LED to stop flashing
before re-inserting media to
attempt another data transfer.
Blue LED does not turn off Large amount of data transferring. • *Wait for data to finish
Note: The time of transfer is transferring.
dependent upon the speed and
size of the transfer media used.
• Contact a Datex Ohmeda trained
Not all data requested is on Transfer media is full. • Attempt transfer using media with
transfer media sufficient free memory.
*For example, if Breath is selected for the sample interval and Waveforms is turned On
in the Data Transfer settings, data transfer could possibly take up to one hour per day
of data transferred.
Parts
2 M4 Thumbscrew (Qty. 2) M1139205
3 M4 Hex Male/Female Standoff (Qty. 2) M1139207
4 Enhanced Serial Port M1057953
15-12 M1205553
Index
Numerics B
100% O2 4-31 Backup mode
changing settings 4-14
A selecting 4-14
Battery 6-3
Abbreviations 1-8 information 11-4
AC power cords 9-4 performance test 7-4
Airway modules 5-2 Breathing circuit alarm test 4-11
calibration 5-8
cleaning 5-9
C
compatibility 5-2, 11-10
connections 5-4 Checkout
maintenance 7-5 failure 4-7, 13-14
parts 9-7 how-to 4-5
Airway Resistance Compensation 4-15, 13-16 neonatal 13-12
Alarms 4-19 Checkout procedure
Alarms Setup menu 4-18 Bypass Checkout 4-3, 4-7, 14-4, 14-9
display 6-3 Cleaning and Maintenance
FRC 12-16 Repair policy 7-2
listing 6-4 Cleaning and sterilization
neonatal 13-19 Cidex OPA 7-8
NIV 14-12 Cidex plus 7-8
priorities 6-2 component processing compatibility 7-7
setting alarm limits 4-24 Compressor 3-22
setting alarm volume 4-19 cleaning 7-10
setting apnea time 4-18 controls 3-23
setting auto limits 4-24 electrical block diagram 11-14
setting default limits 4-25 operation 4-39
setting leak limit 4-18 parts 9-7
setting limits 4-18 pneumatic diagram 11-13
testing 4-8, 13-15 pre-use check 3-24
viewing alarm history 4-19 specifications 11-12
Apnea alarm test 4-9 ComWheel 2-12
Arm
support 3-20 D
Assist control 4-15
Auxiliary pressure 3-13 Data source
purging 3-13 selecting 4-20
Default settings 10-13
deleting 4-26
D-fend 5-3, 7-11
Display
configuration 2-14
controls and indicators 2-12
fields 2-15, 2-16
M1205553 I-1
ventilator 2-14 scaling 12-4

Display arm theory 12-2
remote mounting 3-16
removal 3-16 G
Gas connections 3-6
E
Gas exchange 5-6
EC
accessories 1-3 H
calibration 10-15
EE/RQ Help 2-13
Energy Expenditure 2-32, 5-6 Holds 4-37
Electrical block diagram 8-22 Humidifier 3-3
Electrical outlets 3-21 mounting bracket 3-18
Energy expenditure 5-6 setup 3-18
suggested use 1-2 I
EView 15-2 Increase O2
acquiring and transferring data 15-6 Neonatal 13-18
Data Transfer Settings menu 10-14, 15-6 indicator 6-3
Data Transfer Setup menu 15-7 Infant nCPAP 14-12, 14-13
functional testing 15-9 alarm settings 14-11
installation 15-5 changing from invasive mode to nCPAP
overview 15-4 mode 14-10
parts 15-12 changing from nCPAP mode to invasive
transferring data to the PC 15-10 mode 14-10
transferring data to USB or SD 15-8 changing mode settings 14-10
troubleshooting 15-12 mode settings 14-10
Exhalation valve nCPAP mode to invasive mode 14-8
cleaning 7-15 preparing the ventilator for a patient 14-9
housing 2-2, 2-3 preparing the ventilator 14-8
latch 2-2, 2-3 specifications 14-11
parts 9-2 theory 14-8
Exhalation valve heater 3-15 vent settings 14-11
Expiratory filter 3-3 ventilation settings 14-10
Expiratory flow sensor 2-2 Inspiratory hold 4-37
cleaning 7-13 Install/Service
Expiratory hold 4-37 menu 10-2
password 10-2
F Intrinsic PEEP 4-36
Fan filter
cleaning 7-9 L
display 2-4 Leak Compensation 4-16
ventilator unit 2-4 Low O2 alarm test 4-10
Flow sensor Lung INview 12-13
neonatal 13-5 using 12-14
FRC 12-2
log 12-7
performing 12-2
I-2 M1205553
M NIV (Non-invasive ventilation) Option 14-2
NIV interfaces
Maintenance NIV 14-13
airway module 7-5 NIV mode
checking system status 7-4 preparing the ventilator 14-3
compressor 7-5 NIV mode (Non-invasive ventilation)
part replacement period 7-3 changing mode settings 14-6
schedule 7-2 invasive mode to non invasive mode 14-5
user 7-2 non-invasive mode to invasive mode 14-5
Manual breath 4-33 symbols 14-2
Menus vent settings 14-7
Checkout menu 2-21 Nurse call 3-8
display 2-17
listing 2-19
P
Patient Setup menu 2-20
Select Patient 2-19 P 0.1 4-34
select patient 13-11 Park Circuit 4-23
System Setup 2-20 Parts 15-12
use of 2-18 Patient disconnect test 4-11
Minute volume alarm test 4-9 Patient type 4-3
Mode selection 4-13 Patient weight 4-3, 13-11
Module bay 2-2 PEEP INview 12-5
connection 2-4 PEEP INview reference curve 12-6
Module bay, connection 3-5 PEEPi volume, P Vol 4-36
Monitoring 4-22 performing 4-30
Monitoring Module Power Supply Board 8-24 Pneumatic block diagram 8-25
Motherboard 8-24 Pneumatic nebulizer 4-32
Power connection 3-4
N Power failure alarm test 4-12
Power Management Board (PMB) 8-24
nCPAP 14-13 Procedures 4-31
Nebulizer menu 2-34
Aeroneb Pro 3-9
Aeroneb Solo (disposable) 3-12
Q
cleaning 7-17
connection 2-2, 3-10 Quick keys 2-12
filling 3-10, 3-11
instructions 4-31 R
setup 3-9
T-adapter 3-10, 7-20 Repair policy 7-2
Negative Inspiratory Force (NIF) 4-34 RSBI 4-39
Neonatal 13-2
flow sensor 13-5 S
theory of operation 13-2 Setting
NIV (Non-invasive ventilation) alarm limits 4-18
alarm settings 14-7 Setting definitions 1-12
preparing the ventilator for a patient 14-4 setting families 8-3
specifications 14-7 setting high alert audio 4-19
theory 14-3 Settings 4-24
vent settings 14-7 Silence Alarms 6-2, 13-19
M1205553 I-3
Snapshots 4-25 turning the Touchscreen option on or off 10-

taking 4-25 9
viewing 4-25 using the Favorites Bar 2-11
Specifications Trends
airway module 11-10 displaying 4-26
compressor 11-12 menu 2-36
electrical 11-3 neonatal option 13-20
environmental 11-2 split screen 4-26
neonatal option 13-21 waveforms 4-26
physical 11-2 Trigger compensation 4-17
pneumatic 11-2 Troubleshooting 6-12
ventilation operating 11-5 INview ventilation tools 12-15
SpiroDynamics 12-8 neonatal option 13-20
cursor 12-12 NIV 14-13
setting up 12-10 Turning the system off 4-22
theory 12-8 TV based on 4-17
viewing 12-11
Spirometry U
cursor 4-28
displaying loops 4-27 User maintenance 7-2
Lower spiro split screen 4-29
menu 2-33 V
menu functions 4-28 Vent Calculations 4-30
split screen 4-29 Ventilation
Spontaneous Breathing Trial 4-38 Backup mode 8-2
Rapid Shallow Breathing Index (RSBI) 4- setting mode 4-13
38, 4-39 setting preferences 4-14
Start SBT 4-38 settings 4-13
Stop SBT 4-38 soft limit indicators 4-13
Sprirometry starting 4-21
Sensor type 4-27 stopping 4-22
Standby 4-22 theory 8-2
Suction 4-33, 13-18 ventilation 13-2
Super User 10-2 Ventilation modes 8-3
Support arm, cleaning 7-10 BiLevel 8-14
Sustained airway pressure test 4-10 BiLevel-VG 8-20
Symbols CPAP/PSV 8-16
neonatal 13-5 PCV 8-6
System status 7-4 PCV-VG 8-8
SIMV-PC 8-12
T SIMV-PCVG 8-18
Touchscreen 2-6 SIMV-VC 8-10
changing Favorites Bar defaults 10-8 VCV 8-4
Lock or unlock 2-7 VG-PS (neonatal) 13-3
setting up the Favorites Bar 2-10 Ventilation Monitoring Board (VMB) 8-24
touch points 2-8 Ventilation settings 4-24
turning On or Off 10-9 Ventilator
turning the Favorites Bar on or off 2-10 lock 2-2, 2-3
turning the Touchscreen on or off 2-10 settings 2-15, 2-16
I-4 M1205553
unit 2-2
Ventilator Control Board (VCB) 8-24
W
Water trap
D-fend 7-11
exhalation valve 2-2
Z
Zeroing 3-14
M1205553 I-5
I-6 M1205553
Warranty
This Product is sold by Datex-Ohmeda under the warranties set forth
in the following paragraphs. Such warranties are extended only with
respect to the purchase of this Product directly from Datex-Ohmeda
or Datex-Ohmeda’s Authorized Dealers as new merchandise and are
extended to the Buyer thereof, other than for the purpose of resale.
For a period of twelve (12) months from the date of original delivery to
Buyer or to Buyer’s order, but in no event for a period of more than
two years from the date of original delivery by Datex-Ohmeda to a
Datex-Ohmeda Authorized Dealer, this Product, other than its
expendable parts, is warranted against functional defects in materials
and workmanship and to conform to the description of the Product
contained in this User’s Reference manual and accompanying labels
and/or inserts, provided that the same is properly operated under the
conditions of normal use, that regular periodic maintenance and
service is performed and that replacements and repairs are made in
accordance with the instructions provided. This same warranty is
made for a period of thirty (30) days with respect to expendable parts.
The foregoing warranties shall not apply if the Product has been
repaired other than by Datex-Ohmeda or in accordance with written
instructions provided by Datex-Ohmeda, or altered by anyone other
than Datex-Ohmeda, or if the Product has been subject to abuse,
misuse, negligence, or accident.
Datex-Ohmeda’s sole and exclusive obligation and Buyer’s sole and
exclusive remedy under the above warranties is limited to repairing or
replacing, free of charge, at Datex-Ohmeda’s option, a Product,
which is telephonically reported to the nearest Datex-Ohmeda
Customer Service Center and which, if so advised by Datex-Ohmeda,
is thereafter returned with a statement of the observed deficiency, not
later than seven (7) days after the expiration date of the applicable
warranty, to the Datex-Ohmeda Customer Service and Distribution
Center during normal business hours, transportation charges prepaid,
and which, upon Datex-Ohmeda’s examination, is found not to
conform with above warranties. Datex-Ohmeda shall not be
otherwise liable for any damages including but not limited to
incidental damages, consequential damages, or special damages.
There are no express or implied warranties which extend beyond the
warranties hereinabove set forth. Datex-Ohmeda makes no warranty
of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose with respect to
the product or parts thereof.
User’s Reference Manual
English
M1205553
01 11 004 13 13 04
Printed in USA

EV URM SW 7.x - M1205553 - 0111 - 004 - EN - MSN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EV URM SW 7.x - M1205553 - 0111 - 004 - EN - MSN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engström Carestation

User’s Reference Manual

CAUTION U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the

Engström, Carestation, ComWheel, D-fend, SpiroDynamics,

What is an Engström Carestation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Ventilator overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

NIV Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

General use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Preparing the ventilator for a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Performing Vent Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Compact airway modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Battery indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Repair policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Ventilation theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Exhalation valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Install/Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Ventilation delivery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Lung INview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Neonatal ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Neonatal specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

Non-invasive ventilation (NIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

EView accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

In this section What is an Engström Carestation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

What is an Engström Carestation?

Figure 1-1 • Engström Carestation

The Carestation consists of three main components: a display, a

Symbols used in the manual or on the equipment

On (power) Off (power)

On for part of the equipment Off for part of the equipment

Standby Caution: federal law prohibits

Type BF equipment Type B protection against electrical

Attention, refer to product instructions Caution, ISO 7000-0434

REF Stock number

Direct current Alternating current

Earth ground Protective earth ground

Equipotential connector Fuse

To identify on a control that a function is To identify on a control that a function is

+ Plus, positive polarity

Movement in one direction Movement in both directions

This way up Warning, dangerous voltage

Pneumatic inlet Pneumatic outlet

Electrical input Electrical output

Inspiratory port Expiratory port

Electrical testing certification Inspiratory breath identifier

Serial port Module data indicator

Module bay port Electronic micropump nebulizer

Auxiliary pressure port Display signal input/output

No battery/battery failure Battery in use. Bar indicates amount of

Silence alarms Submenu

Hour meter Drain outlet

Heavy object USB port

Ethernet connection Network ID connection

134°C Autoclavable Not autoclavable

SpiroDynamics option is installed Functional Residual Capacity option is

Maximum Neonatal patient type

Pediatric patient type Adult patient type

Indicates that the waste of electrical GOST R Russian certification

Manufacturer Non-invasive mode is in use

This product consists of devices that Secure Digital

Consult operating instructions Heat transfer

This device contains phthalates Single use devices

Risks and precautionary measures This single-use product is not designed